JP5234583B2 - Pachinko ball take-in type game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine installed in an island facility to which a pachinko ball is supplied as a game medium and provided with a storage unit capable of storing the pachinko ball.

  2. Description of the Related Art A slot machine that can start a game by inserting medals as game media is conventionally known. On the other hand, in recent years, pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machines are also becoming popular in pachinko halls as game machines installed in island facilities where pachinko balls are supplied as game media.

  In this type of pachinko ball take-in type game machine, a storage part capable of storing a pachinko ball as a game medium is provided on the front side of the game machine, and a predetermined part of the pachinko balls stored in the storage part is provided. When a number of pachinko balls are taken in by the take-in device, the game can be started. When the game is started, the rotation display of the rotation display device is started. And, when the rotation display device is stopped and displayed, if the combination of the stop symbols displayed on the active line is a specific combination, a bonus game that can acquire a large number of pachinko balls as prize balls in a short time is executed (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-166755 A

  However, in order to play one game in a pachinko ball take-in type game machine, a large amount of pachinko balls need to be taken inside. Also, when paying out pachinko balls as prize balls, it is often necessary to pay out a large amount of prize balls. As described above, since it takes a considerable amount of time to take in and pay out a large amount of pachinko balls, the progress of the game tends to be hindered in the pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. It was.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to reduce the interest by reducing the disadvantage that the progress of the game is hindered as a large amount of pachinko balls are taken in and out. Provide a pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine that can be controlled.

  In order to solve the above problems, a pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine installed in an island facility supplied with a pachinko ball as a game medium, the pachinko ball supplied from the island facility, and a player The pachinko balls that are replenished by the storage unit that can store at least one game can be stored, and a rotation display row that is provided with a plurality of symbols and can be rotated and displayed intersects the rotation direction. A plurality of rotation display devices arranged side by side in the direction, a pachinko ball take-in device that can take in pachinko balls stored in the storage portion, and a considerable number of pachinko balls from the storage portion. A plurality of winning combinations including at least a starting operation unit that can accept a player's starting operation, a bonus combination, and a plurality of types of general roles other than the bonus combination when taken in by the capture device An internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery that can win any one based on a start operation in the start operation unit for each game, and when the start operation is accepted in the start operation unit, the plurality of rotation displays A rotation display control means for rotating the row and a stop operation for each of the plurality of rotation display rows to stop the plurality of rotation display rows rotated by the rotation display control means for each row. A stop operation unit that can be received and a rotation stop of the rotation display row are controlled according to the result of the internal lottery for each rotation display row for which the stop operation is received in the stop operation portion. A combination of symbols formed over the rotation display stop control means and the plurality of rotation display rows in a predetermined symbol display unit is one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the plurality of winning combinations. Whether it is applicable When it is determined by the display symbol determination means to be determined and the combination of symbols corresponding to the general combination is displayed by the display symbol determination means, the game value corresponding to the type of the general combination is determined for each game. A game value giving means for giving a prize to a pachinko ball paying device for paying out the given number of pachinko balls to the storage section when the pachinko ball is given as the prize, and the display symbol determining means When it is determined that a combination of symbols corresponding to a bonus combination is displayed, a bonus game in which a pachinko ball as the game value is increased as an award is given to the storage unit by the pachinko ball payout device as a prize. Except when the jackpot game granting means to be granted and when the jackpot game is given, the game state is always changed to the front as the game progresses. A game state control means for controlling the total amount of pachinko balls to be taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device to a normal game state in which the total amount of pachinko balls to be paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device is higher, When the game state control means controls the normal game state, when a single game is executed, a considerable amount of pachinko balls are taken in from the storage unit by the pachinko ball take-in device, As the game progresses, the pachinko balls stored in the storage section gradually decrease. On the other hand, at least when the big hit game is given by the big hit game giving means, the pachinko ball payout device is used for a large amount of pachinko balls in the big hit game. The ball is paid out to the storage unit as an award, and the gaming state control means The gaming state after the winning game is given is controlled to a pachinko ball non-taking-in gaming state in which the pachinko ball taking-in device increases the chance of starting the game without having to take in the pachinko ball from the storage unit. It is characterized by that.

  The pachinko ball take-in type game machine of the present invention is attached to an island facility to which a pachinko ball is supplied as a game medium. This island facility is generally called a pachinko machine island, and is a facility of a game hall where a pachinko machine using a pachinko ball as a game medium can be installed. In addition, the installation height of the gaming machine in Pachinko Machine Island is most often about 60 cm.

  This pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine has a plurality of symbols, and a rotation display device in which a plurality of rotation display rows that can be rotated (rotated) are arranged side by side in a direction crossing the rotation direction. And an internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery.

  In addition, a pachinko ball take-in device that can take in a pachinko ball stored in a predetermined storage unit as a multiplier is provided according to a pachinko ball hung instruction. The pachinko ball is instructed by, for example, operating a take-in operation unit for instructing to take in the pachinko ball as a multiplier. When the number of pachinko balls according to the pachinko ball hanging instruction is taken in from the reservoir by the pachinko ball take-in device, the hanging instruction according to the number of pachinko balls taken is established, and the taken pachinko ball is Derived to the equipment side. In general, a player can selectively place one of 1BET, 2BET, and 3BET (in some cases, only 3BET can be used), and a 3BET is played to play a game. Is common. Therefore, when a player plays a game, a considerable amount of pachinko balls are taken into the interior from the storage unit. Here, the “substantial number of pachinko balls” are 10 or more pachinko balls that may cause a delay in the progress of the game. When playing a game with 3 BETs, 15 pachinko balls are generally used. It is a sphere.

  A plurality of types of symbols are attached to the rotation display row, and the rotation display row rotates in the vertical direction. Further, a plurality (for example, three rows) of the rotation display rows are arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction. Since the rotation direction of the rotation display row is the vertical direction, a plurality of (for example, three rows) rotation display rows are arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, it is more common that the symbol band on which the symbol is drawn is attached to the rotation display row than the symbol is directly drawn on the rotation display row. Accordingly, the “rotation display sequence with a plurality of symbols attached” includes a rotation display sequence to which a design band on which the symbols are drawn is attached.

  The internal lottery means an internal lottery that selects one or more combinations from among a plurality of types of bonus combinations, multiple general combinations, and losers for each game that is played with a pachinko ball as a multiplier. I do. Further, the bonus combination and the general combination are usually referred to as winning combinations. Note that the pachinko sphere taken in as a multiplier may include electronic data generally called credits in addition to the pachinko sphere taken in from the pachinko sphere taking-in device.

  Note that “a game that is played once a pachinko ball is taken in as a multiplier” is a game that is played by setting a predetermined multiplier by taking in a pachinko ball. The game includes one game that is played by the take-in device and one game that is played with a predetermined multiplier automatically set by winning a service role described later.

  In addition, the internal lottery means does not necessarily have to be a single role selected from among a plurality of bonus roles, a plurality of general roles, and a loser role. Any mode may be used as long as at least one combination is selected from the above. Therefore, a mode in which two combinations are selected from a plurality of bonus combinations, a plurality of general combinations, and a lost combination is also included.

  When a predetermined multiplier is set by taking in a considerable amount of pachinko balls, it is possible to accept the player's starting operation in the starting operation section. Then, when the player's start operation is accepted in the start operation unit, the rotation display control means starts to rotate all the rotation display rows. Then, when the stop operation of the rotation display row rotating in the stop operation unit is accepted, the rotation display row for which the stop operation has been received by the rotation display stop control means is stopped based on the result of the internal lottery. . When all the rotation display rows are stopped, the result of the internal lottery can be derived to a predetermined symbol display section by a combination of symbols attached to each rotation display row. The reason that “it can be derived” is that even if the internal lottery is won, for example, if the selection fails, the result of the internal lottery is not always derived to the display unit.

  In other words, if the line from which the symbol combination as a result of the internal lottery constituted by selecting one symbol for each rotation display row from the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is derived is an effective line. The result of the internal lottery is derived to a predetermined symbol display unit as a symbol combination located on the effective line by the above-described rotation display stop control means. When all the rotation display rows are stopped, the combination of symbols formed across all of the plurality of rotation display rows in the symbol display unit by the display symbol determination means corresponds to a plurality of winning combinations. It is determined whether the combination is applicable (in other words, whether or not a winning combination of a plurality of bonus combinations and a plurality of general combinations is won).

  Note that the winning combination determined by the display symbol determining means does not have to be any one of the plurality of bonus combinations and the plurality of general combinations. That is, when a plurality of roles are selected in duplicate, a mode in which the plurality of roles win simultaneously, and even if a plurality of roles are selected in duplicate, Any mode in which only one winning combination can be won is included.

  If it is determined by the display symbol determination means that one of the plurality of general roles has been won, the game value corresponding to the type of the general combination determined to have won is determined for each game. The prize is awarded by the game value granting means. Here, “game value” corresponds to, for example, a pachinko ball capable of playing a game, a right to play a next game without having to take in a pachinko ball at all, and the like.

  In this way, by providing a service role that allows the next game to be played without the need for any pachinko balls to be taken in, the pachinko ball take-in type is different from the pachinko machines that are required to drive the pachinko balls into the game area It is possible to enjoy the fun unique to the spinning game machine, to provide a new game machine that has never existed, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the pachinko ball is awarded as an award, the number of pachinko balls to be awarded is paid out to the storage unit by the pachinko ball payout device. The pachinko ball dispensing device receives the supply of pachinko balls from the island facility, and when receiving a dispensing instruction such as when a prize ball is awarded, the number of pachinko balls according to the dispensing instruction is paid from the island facility side to the storage unit. put out.

  In this pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine, when a bonus combination is selected by internal lottery, a jackpot game (so-called bonus game) in which the chance that a pachinko ball as a game value is awarded as an award increases, It is executed by the jackpot game granting means.

  Further, the game state is always controlled to the normal game state except when the big hit game is awarded. The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the total amount of pachinko balls taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device becomes larger than the total amount of pachinko balls paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device as the game progresses. “The total amount of pachinko balls to be taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device as the game progresses” is a pachinko ball as a pachinko ball necessary for executing a predetermined number of times when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state. It is the total amount of pachinko spheres taken in by the take-in device. The “total amount of pachinko balls to be paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device” means the total amount of pachinko balls that can be paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device when the predetermined number of games are executed (probabilistic). The total amount of pachinko balls that can be paid out as a prize. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the normal game state, the pachinko balls stored in the storage unit gradually decrease as the game progresses. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is necessary for the player to replenish a large amount of pachinko balls in the storage unit in order to continue the game. In addition, since a considerable amount of pachinko balls are taken in from the reservoir by the pachinko ball take-in device when one game is executed, the amount of pachinko balls stored in the reservoir is drastically reduced as the game progresses. .

  However, at least when a jackpot game is awarded, a large amount of pachinko balls are paid out to the storage unit as a prize by the jackpot game. At the same time, the game state control means does not require the pachinko ball to be taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device for the game state after the big hit game is given, and the chance of starting the game is increased. Control to capture game state.

  In this pachinko ball non-taking game state, the pachinko ball is completely taken in by the pachinko ball taking device until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number of games are executed or a predetermined eye is derived). The next game can be executed without being lost. In other words, this pachinko ball non-capturing gaming state is a gaming state in which a profit that allows the next game to be executed without taking the pachinko ball is given unconditionally (regardless of the reel appearance). In the gaming state, the player can continue the game without reducing any pachinko balls stored in the storage unit. In addition, the pachinko ball non-uptake game state is only a game state in which the pachinko ball is not automatically taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device, and the bet is automatically established and the chance that the starting operation unit becomes effective is increased. Alternatively, a gaming state may be established in which a bet is automatically established and the opportunity to automatically start the next game is increased without a start operation in the start operation unit.

  By the way, since this pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine uses pachinko balls as game media, it is necessary to take in a considerable amount of pachinko balls inside to play one game (for example, (The number of pachinko balls required for 3 bets is 15 balls).

  Conventionally, in the case of a spinning-reel game machine, when the game medium is paid out by the payout device, the start lever is not accepted and the game is controlled so as not to be started. Therefore, in pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machines that use pachinko balls as game media, the number of award ball payouts tends to increase. As a result, the progress of the game may be delayed. In particular, such a phenomenon is likely to occur in a jackpot game in which prize balls are paid out in a short time.

  In view of these characteristics, in this pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine using pachinko balls as a game medium, the pachinko balls in the storage section gradually decrease in the normal gaming state, so the player must replenish the pachinko balls. However, after the big hit game, it is controlled to a pachinko ball non-uptake game state in which the game proceeds without any need of taking in the pachinko ball. Therefore, in the pachinko ball non-incorporating game state, the player can proceed with only the winning ball acquired by the big hit game without requiring the player to replenish the pachinko ball.

  By the way, in general, in the pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine, there is a limit to the amount of pachinko balls that can be stored in the storage part, so if a big hit game is performed, the prize ball overflows from the storage part, and from the storage part It is necessary to move the pachinko balls to the bottom plate or prize ball box. On the other hand, as described above, since the amount of pachinko balls required to be executed in one game is large, compared to a ball game machine or the like that launches and plays pachinko balls one by one, There is a risk that the ball will decrease quickly (that is, the pachinko balls in the reservoir are likely to disappear). In particular, even if a large number of prize balls are won by the big hit game, if the pachinko ball is quickly lost from the storage part in the subsequent game, there is a possibility that the interest of the game improved by the big hit game may be reduced at once. is there.

  In this regard, in this pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine, after the big hit game, the game is controlled to a non-pachinko ball taking-in game state in which the game proceeds without taking in the pachinko ball, so the player puts the pachinko ball in the storage dish. There is no need to replenish at all, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the player and make the game progress smoothly. In addition, since the pachinko ball non-incorporated gaming state does not directly give a large amount of prize balls to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest after the big hit game while balancing the profits of the hall and the player. Furthermore, in the pachinko ball non-capture game state, the game can be performed while maintaining the state where the storage portion is filled with a large amount of prize balls, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game improved by the big hit game. The

  According to the present invention, there is provided a pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine in which a decrease in interest is suppressed by facilitating the progress of the game as a whole even when a large amount of pachinko balls are taken in and out.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a ball throwing and spinning machine using a game ball as a game medium will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Installation environment for ball throwing cylinder]
The ball throwing and revolving machine of this embodiment uses a game ball as a game medium. Since medals and game balls have different values, a prescribed number (for example, 5) of game balls is used as one unit, and one medal is associated with them. In addition, it is installed in Pachinko Machine Island in order to use game balls as game media. The highest installation height of pachinko machine islands is about 60cm. On the other hand, so-called slot machines that use medals as game media are installed in island facilities called slot machine islands. The installation height of the gaming machine on the slot machine island is most often about 50 cm. In other words, pachinko machine island is about 10 cm higher than slot machine island.

[Outline of the game in the ball throwing machine]
In the ball throwing and revolving machine of the present invention, the game ball is stored in the game ball tray, and the betting button is operated to operate the game ball take-in device. It is. When the game ball is taken in, the effective line is determined and the start lever can be operated. When the start lever is operated by the player's operation, the three symbol reel drive motors are activated and a lottery is performed. Depending on the lottery result, the bonus can be obtained, a small role, a service role, and a loss. When the rotation of the symbol reel reaches a constant rotation (for example, 80 rpm), the stop button can be operated.

  When the player presses the reel stop button, the corresponding symbol reel stops.At this time, even if the reel stop button is pushed a little earlier, The symbol corresponding to the winning combination is drawn into the active line to stop it. On the contrary, even if the symbol that is not won is pushed and the reel stop button is pushed, it is pushed out of the effective line and cannot be won.

  When all the symbol reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not a prize has been won. For example, when winning a small role, the game ball payout device is driven and a specified number of game balls are paid out. The The above is a series of game flows.

[Main configuration of ball throwing machine]
The main configuration of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the ball throwing rotator machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the ball throwing rotator machine 1 as seen from the front upper right, and FIG. 3 shows a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the ball throwing rotator machine 1 as viewed from the upper right front, FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the ball throwing rotator machine 1 as seen from the front upper right, and FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 5, and FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 that can be installed on an island facility of a pachinko machine, and a box-shaped main body housing 3 that is disposed in the outer frame 2 and has an open front surface. A door-shaped front surface that is rotatably supported by a hinged door 122 between a closed position for closing the front surface of the main body housing 3 and an open position for opening the front surface of the main body housing 3. It is comprised from the member 4. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, when the door-shaped front member 4 is divided into three parts, that is, an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage, three sets of symbols are individually driven by a stepping motor behind the upper drum window portion 14. Reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are facing. Hereinafter, the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are collectively referred to as the symbol variation display device 13. In addition, behind the middle display device window 16, an effect display device 15 made of a liquid crystal display device or the like is arranged. In addition, the area | region which forms the window part which match | combined the window part 14 for drums and the window part 16 for display apparatuses in the door-shaped front member 4 is the transparent window 12 formed in the substantially upper half part of the said door-shaped front member 4. is there. An operation panel 6 is disposed at the top of the lower stage of the door-shaped front member 4. Here, the drum window portion 14 corresponds to the small drum window portion of the present invention, and the display device window portion 16 corresponds to the large display window portion of the present invention.

  Further, since the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 is attached to the pachinko machine island, a game ball payout device 18 for paying out the game balls supplied from the pachinko machine island based on the lottery result or the game state (see FIG. 3) and a game ball take-in device 19 for taking a number of game balls in accordance with the player's operation into the main body housing 3 (pachinko machine island side) when playing a game. (See FIG. 3). That is, the player can continuously play the game by storing the game balls paid out by the game ball paying device 18 and throwing in a predetermined number of these game balls through the game ball taking-in device 19. Is possible.

[Configuration of operation panel]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 6, the operation panel 6 has a horizontally long and substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and is formed so as to protrude toward the player side. In addition, although the protrusion amount of the operation panel 6 with respect to the front surface of the display device window portion 16 is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, for example, so that the player's hand can be placed in a stable state, for example It is about 6cm. In the operation panel 6, the left side surface is substantially perpendicular to the front surface, but the right side surface is a substantially arcuate curved surface. On the upper surface of the operation panel 6, one MAX bet button 7 and one bet button 8 are provided as an input operation unit that can instruct the player to input a game ball. The MAX bet button 7 is larger than the 1 bet button 8 and is disposed closer to the front than the 1 bet button 8. On the other hand, on the front surface of the operation panel 6 protruding to the player side, there are one start lever 9 and three reel stop buttons 10 (10a, 10b, 10c) as game operation means for instructing the progress of the game. They are arranged in a line. With this arrangement, the player can sequentially operate the MAX bet button 7, the start lever 9, and the reel stop button 10 without moving the hand placed on the upper surface of the operation panel 6 so much. It becomes possible. Here, the MAX bet button 7 and the 1 bet button 8 correspond to the input buttons of the present invention.

[Configuration of the storage tray]
As shown in FIG.2 and FIG.7, the storage tray body 20 is provided in the front surface of the door-shaped front member 4 as an apparatus which stores the game ball paid out by the game ball paying apparatus 18 (refer FIG. 3). . The storage tray 20 is formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the door-shaped front member 4 to the player side, stores the game balls that have been paid out, and faces the game ball take-in device 19 (see FIG. 3). A game ball can be allowed to flow down.

  In particular, the storage tray body 20 of the present embodiment is formed of a member different from the operation panel 6 and is formed to protrude from the position below the operation panel 6 to the player side. For this reason, it is possible to operate the input operation unit and the game operation unit in a relaxed state. In other words, in a ball throwing and revolving machine in which the operation panel and the storage tray body are combined, specifically, the throwing operation portion and the game operation portion are arranged on the front surface of the storage tray body protruding to the player side, It is difficult for a person to operate a game operation unit or the like with his / her hand placed on or placed on the storage tray body. Since the game ball flowing down in the body touches the hand, it must be played with care so that the game ball does not scatter. However, as in the present embodiment, the storage tray 20 is a separate member from the operation panel 6. With this configuration, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for placing a hand on the upper surface of the operation panel 6 and to prevent the hand from touching the game ball of the storage tray 20, thereby allowing the game to be performed in a relaxed state. It becomes possible. In particular, since the amount of protrusion of the operation panel 6 is larger than the amount of protrusion of the storage plate body 20, the operation lever 6 is stored even when the start lever 9 or the reel stop button 10 disposed on the front surface of the operation panel 6 is operated. The operation can be performed without touching the dish 20.

  By the way, in the case where the storage tray body 20 is simply made independent of the operation panel 6, the effect display device 15 provided above the operation panel 6 is arranged near the upper part of the door-shaped front member 4, and thus visibility is improved. May decrease. In particular, as described above, in the pachinko machine island, the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 is installed at a position approximately 10 cm higher than the slot island facility using a medal as a game medium. It looks up from below, and there is a risk that the visibility will be significantly deteriorated. On the other hand, in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 of the present embodiment, a so-called one-plate structure is formed by removing the lower pan generally provided in this type of gaming machine. For this reason, the arrangement | positioning of the storage tray body 20 and the operation panel 6 can be made low entirely, and it is possible to arrange the production | presentation display apparatus 15 in the appropriate position with good visibility.

  Further, although the operation panel 6 and the storage dish body 20 both project toward the player side, a gap 21 (see FIG. 1) is provided between the operation panel 6 and the storage dish body 20. According to this, it becomes possible to visually recognize the game balls stored in the storage tray body 20 or the game balls guided by the storage tray body 20, and easily grasp the presence or absence of storage or the amount of game balls stored. Can be made. Further, it is possible to continue the game with peace of mind by visually grasping the number of game balls that can be thrown in. In addition, it is preferable that the magnitude | size of the clearance gap 21 is 1.5 cm or more and 4 cm or less. By setting the size of the gap 21 to approximately 1.5 cm or more, it is possible to insert a finger through the gap 21 between the operation panel 6 and the storage dish body 20. For this reason, even when it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball through the gap 21, it is possible to confirm the presence of the game ball by inserting a finger. Moreover, even when a ball clogging occurs in the storage dish 20, it is possible to easily cope with it. On the other hand, by setting the size of the gap 21 to approximately 4 cm or less, the player's fist can be prevented from entering between the operation panel 6 and the storage tray body 20, and as a result, a game ball communicating with the storage tray body 20. It becomes possible to suppress fraud against the capture device 19 and the like. The fraudulent act is an act of illegally counting game balls by intruding a wire or the like toward the game ball capturing device 19.

  In addition, the storage tray body 20 of the present embodiment is disposed corresponding to the game ball payout opening 24 and has a storage portion 25 that is wide in depth and communicates with the storage portion 25 and faces the game ball capturing device 19. A narrow passage portion 26 for allowing the game ball to flow down is formed, and a bank portion 27 for preventing the game ball from departing is formed on the entire outer periphery. As described above, the storage tray 20 is divided into the storage portion 25 and the passage portion 26, so that a relatively large number of game balls are stored in the storage portion 25, and the game ball capturing device 19 is stored in the passage portion 26. It is possible to smoothly flow down the game ball toward. In addition, a ball dropping hole 22 is provided at a substantially central portion of the storage unit 25, and in a normal state, the ball dropping valve 22a is urged in a closing direction so that a game ball cannot be removed. When it is desired to remove the game ball from the storage unit 25, the ball drop button 23 is pushed to activate a link (not shown) to open the ball drop valve 22a. The game ball passes through the ball drop hole 22 and the door-shaped front member 4 is opened. Falls from the bottom of the box and is returned to the player.

  In addition, an opaque closing member 28 that closes the upper surface of the passage portion 26 is provided in the downstream portion of the passage portion 26, and illegal acts on the game ball take-in device 19, that is, illegally infiltrate a wire or the like. It is possible to more surely prevent an illegal operation for counting game balls. By the way, when the downstream side of the passage portion 26 is closed by the closing member 28, the downstream side of the passage portion 26 rolls even if a gap 21 is formed between the operation panel 6 and the storage tray body 20. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the game ball. For this reason, for example, when the game is ended, it is difficult to check whether or not the game balls remain on the storage tray body 20, that is, whether all the game balls are used up or all of the game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a spherical viewing window 29 made of a transparent member is formed on the front surface of the storage dish body 20. For this reason, it becomes possible to easily recognize the game ball rolling in the passage portion 26, and in particular, since the ball viewing window 29 is formed in the front surface portion of the storage dish body 20, the posture of looking through the gap 21 It is possible to visually recognize the game in a natural manner without taking the game.

  In addition, an open space 30 that is not covered by the operation panel 6 is provided above the storage unit 25 in the storage dish 20. In other words, the operation panel 6 is arranged to be shifted to the right side so as to be formed only above the passage portion 26 in the storage dish body 20. For this reason, the storage state in the storage unit 25 can be easily visually recognized from above or obliquely from above. That is, even if it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball rolling in the passage portion 26, at least only the storage state of the game ball is clearly recognized, so that the game ball (prize ball) released from the payout port 24 is recognized. Can be visually recognized, and the original fun of the gaming machine can be maintained. That is, when the paid-out game ball cannot be visually recognized, it becomes difficult to realize the pay-out of the game ball and there is a possibility that the interest of the game will be halved, but in the storage unit 25 as in the present embodiment. By making the storage state clearly visible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  A game state lamp 31 for displaying a game state by light emission is disposed on the front surface of the door-shaped front member 4 located in the open space 30. For this reason, it is possible to visually recognize the storage state of the game ball while confirming the game state based on the light emission state of the game state lamp 31. Therefore, it becomes possible to pay more attention to the game state lamp 31 and recognize the change in the game state in association with the payout state of the game ball. Even when the game state lamp 31 is disposed above the storage unit 25, the game state lamp 31 does not protrude greatly toward the player side, so that the game balls stored in the storage unit 25 are not shielded. That is, the visibility of the storage state can be maintained.

[Composition of loan settlement operation section]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, a horizontally long flat protrusion 35 is formed below the storage tray body 20 so as to protrude from the storage tray body 20 toward the player side. On an upper surface of 35, a lending / settlement operating unit 36 (specifically, a lending / returning button and a return button) that allows a player to instruct lending or settlement of a gaming ball is provided. In addition, by arranging the lending and settlement operation unit 36 that is rarely operated during the game, below the storage plate body 20, that is, in the vicinity of the lower end of the door-shaped front member 4, it can be provided without interfering with the game. Moreover, since the flat protrusion part 35 is projected and formed in the player side, even if it arrange | positions in the vicinity of the storage tray body 20, it becomes possible to operate easily. Further, the upper surface of the flat protrusion 35 is composed of an inclined surface 37 that is inclined downward toward the player side, and the lending and settlement operating unit 36 is disposed on the inclined surface 37. It is possible to easily operate the lending / settlement operating unit 36 that is inclined upward and is disposed at the lower end portion of the door-shaped front member 4. In addition, an electrical decoration unit 38 that emits light based on the gaming state is arranged around the lending and settlement operating unit 36 in the flat protrusion 35, so that the location of the lending and settlement operating unit 36 can be conspicuous during the game. This makes it possible to reduce the trouble of confirming the location of the lending / settlement operation unit 36 at the time of settlement and the like, thus improving usability. Further, although not shown in the drawing, the CR (credit) balance is displayed by a 7-segment LED between the left and right loan settlement operation units 36 (ball lending button and return button).

[Configuration of game ball dispensing device]
As shown in FIG. 3, a vertically long payout device mounting portion (not shown) corresponding to the game ball payout device 18 is formed in the vertical direction closer to one side of the main body housing 3. The dispensing device mounting portion is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side. The game ball payout device 18 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the concave portion of the payout device mounting portion, and is unitized by mounting various components related to payout. Note that the game ball payout device 18 has a conventionally well-known configuration, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

[Configuration of game ball take-in device]
Next, the configuration of the game ball take-in device 19 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game ball take-in device 19 disassembled and viewed from the back side of the game machine, FIG. 12 (a) is a front view of the game ball carrier, and FIG. 12 (b) is a game ball. FIG. 12 (c) is a side view of the transport body, FIG. 12 (c) is a rear view of the game ball transport body, and FIG. 13 is a ball release valve detection that detects whether the ball release valve and the ball release valve are moving forward or backward. 14 is a perspective view showing the relation between the game device and the game device, FIG. 14 is a view showing the taking-in operation state of the game ball taking-in device 19 from the back side, and FIG. FIG. 16 is a view showing a state in which the ball is being removed, and FIG. 16 is a view showing a state in which the game ball carrier is reversed to discharge the remaining game ball in the game ball take-in device 19. Yes, FIG. 17 shows that the game ball to be continuously taken in during the take-in operation in the game ball take-in device 19 is missing. If is a diagram illustrating a.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the game ball take-in device 19, a back ball passage member 52, a front ball passage member 53, and a game ball take-in device substrate 67 are fixed to a base 51, and a game ball carrier 54 is placed therein. Is fixed to the motor shaft 62 on the same axis line together with the angle detection plate 63 so that it can rotate. The motor body is not shown.

  Since the components attached to the back sphere passage member 52 and the front sphere passage member 53 are substantially the same, the parts attached to the front sphere passage member 53 will be described here.

  The game ball flowing into the front ball passage member 53 rolls in the front inflow passage 53a, and when the ball removal valve 55 is in the forward position (normally, the ball is biased to the forward position by the coil spring 61). The front game ball transport body rotation space 53b is reached. In the front game ball transport body rotating space 53b, the game ball transport body 54 provided with sprocket-like teeth on the rotating disk comes into contact.

  The sprocket-like tooth recess of the game ball transport body 54 is designed so that only one game ball can be placed. By rotating the game ball transport body 54 counterclockwise, the game ball is transported in the take-in direction. Finally, after being separated from the game ball carrier 54 and detected by the front take-in count switch 58, it is returned to the pachinko machine island through the front game ball discharge port 53e through a return passage (not shown). .

  When the game ball flows over the ball removal valve 55 and flows into the front game ball transport body rotation space 53b, the game ball is bitten between the sprocket-like tooth convex portion of the game ball transport body 54 and the front ball biting prevention piece 69. There is a possibility that. In this embodiment, the front ball biting prevention piece 69 is moved by elasticity to prevent the game ball from biting and stopping the operation. Details will be described later.

  Normally, the ball removal valve 55 is biased by the coil spring 61 so as to reach the forward movement position, and the game ball rolls on the ball removal valve 55. The ball removal valve 55 is connected to the ball removal knob 11 by elastic deformation of the claw, and can slide in the ball removal valve sliding portion 53f. In the normal state, the coil spring 61 is biased to the forward position, so that the ball removal valve 55 is in a closed state. However, when the player operates the ball removal knob 11, the ball removal valve 55 is operated. 55 becomes an open state, and the game ball falls downward and is returned to the player through the previous game ball drop path 53c.

  A front proximity switch 60 is provided below the path of the game ball near the entrance of the front inflow passage 53a, and is turned on when the game ball is filled up to the position of the proximity switch to ensure a constant ball pressure. It is detected that

  Further, the ball removal valve 55 is provided with a ball removal valve light-shielding portion 55a, and the ball removal valve detector 56 detects the advance / retreat of the ball removal valve 55. Specifically, the player operates the ball removal knob 11 to detect that the ball has been removed and that the ball removal valve 55 has moved forward again by releasing the hand.

  When it is detected that the ball release valve 55 has moved forward again after the ball is released, the game ball carrier 54 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the game placed on the game ball carrier 54 The ball is returned to the player through the front ball removal path 53d.

  A game ball take-in device board 67 is screwed to the base 51, and an angle detection photo switch 64 is disposed on the game ball take-in apparatus substrate 67, and is fixed to the motor shaft 62 together with the game ball transport body 54. By detecting a slit 63a provided in the angle detection plate 63, the discharge position where the game ball falls from the game ball transport body 54 is detected. The combination of the angle detection photo switch 64, the angle detection plate 63, and the slit 63a provided in the angle detection plate 63 constitutes a “game ball drop position detection means”.

  Further, the light shielding member 65 is fastened together with the game ball take-in device substrate 67, and together with the light shielding wall 51b of the base 51, the ambient light is not incident on the angle detection photoswitch 64, so that the angle detection photoswitch 64 It prevents malfunction.

  The ball release valve detector 56 is attached to the ball release valve detector mounting hole 51a of the base 51 by a ball release valve detector fixing claw 56c. A motor body (not shown) is fastened to the base 51 together with the heat sink 70.

<Shape of game ball carrier>
As shown in FIG. 12B, the game ball carrier 54 includes a front ball receiving portion 54A corresponding to the front inflow passage 53a, a back ball receiving portion 54B corresponding to the back inflow passage 52a, and a front ball receiving portion 54A. And the back ball receiving portion 54B, and the front ball receiving portion 54A, the back ball receiving portion 54B, and the disc portion 54C are integrally formed on the same rotation axis. ing.

  Each of the ball receiving portions 54A and 54B has a sprocket shape, and can accept only one game ball on the outer periphery thereof, and groove-shaped concave portions 54d formed along the rotation axis are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. A plurality of protrusions 54e are provided between the respective recesses 54d, and a plurality of protrusions 54e are formed between the respective recesses 54d (in this embodiment, each ball receiving portion has a recess 54d on which one game ball is placed. And six convex portions 54e for forming the concave portions 54d are provided).

  The concave portion 54d includes a base end portion 54d1 formed in a direction substantially along the motor shaft (rotation shaft) and a center direction of the rotation shaft from the inner side toward the tip end in the direction along the rotation axis (as the distance from the disk portion 54C). An inclined portion 54d2 that is inclined in the direction is provided. Similarly, the convex portion 54e also has a base end portion 54e1 formed in a direction substantially flat with the motor shaft, and is inclined in the direction of the rotation axis from the inside toward the tip in the direction along the rotation axis (as the distance from the disk portion 54C). And an inclined portion 54e2 (inclined toward the center of the motor shaft). In this embodiment, since the game ball transport body 54 is resin-molded, the base end portion 54d1 and the base end portion 54e1 have a gradient of a draft angle.

  As the game ball transport body 54 rotates, each concave portion 54d receives a game ball that flows in from the radial direction at the receiving position, and transports the game ball by dropping the game ball at the discharge position. The arrow Y3 in FIG. 12A is the direction in which the game ball enters, and the arrow Y5 indicates the direction in which the game ball is discharged away from the game ball carrier 54. The approach direction Y3 and the discharge direction Y5 are defined by the shape of the front ball passage member 53 and the convex portion 54e. Similarly, an arrow Y4 in FIG. 12C indicates a direction in which a game ball enters, and an arrow Y6 indicates a direction in which the game ball is discharged away from the game ball carrier 54. The approach direction Y4 and the discharge direction Y6 are defined by the shape of the back sphere passage member 52 and the convex portion 54e. In this embodiment, the discharge direction Y5 and the discharge direction Y6 have an angle difference of 30 °, and the front ball receiving portion 54A and the back ball receiving portion 54B have the same phase with respect to the motor shaft, but the concave portion 54d (the convex portion 54e) is discharged at an angle difference of 30 °, which is a half pitch, while the pitch of 60e) is 60 °, so that the game ball is moved to the front ball receiving portion 54A and the back ball receiving portion while the game ball transport body 54 is rotating. It will be discharged alternately from 54B.

<Details of ball release valve>
As shown in FIG. 13 (a), the ball removal valve 55 serves as both a valve for ball removal and a part of the passage of the game ball, and when the valve is closed (forward), the back ball passage valve 55b is It becomes a surface substantially continuous with the back inflow passage 52a and guides the game ball to the back game ball transport body rotation space 52b. At the same time, the front ball passage valve 55c becomes a surface substantially continuous with the front inflow passage 53a and guides the game ball to the front game ball transport body rotation space 53b.

  The ball removal knob attaching claw portion 55d is a claw for engaging with the ball removal knob 11 (see FIG. 11). The coil spring attachment portion 55e is a protrusion for attaching the coil spring 61 shown in FIG.

  The ball removal valve light-shielding portion 55a blocks between the ball removal valve detector light-emitting portion 56a and the ball removal valve detector light-receiving portion 56b of the ball removal valve detector 56, which is a transmission type photosensor, when retreating. Reference numeral 56c denotes a ball release valve detector fixing claw for attaching the ball release valve detector 56 to the ball release valve detector mounting hole 51a (see FIG. 11) of the base 51.

  In a normal state, the ball removal valve 55 is pressed to the forward movement position by the bias of the coil spring 61 as shown in FIG. At this time, since the ball removal valve light-shielding portion 55a does not block the ball removal valve detector 56, it is not detected. Here, when the player operates the ball removal knob 11 (see FIG. 1) to move the ball removal valve 55 to the retracted position, the ball removal valve light-shielding portion 55a is connected to the ball removal valve detector light emitting portion 56a and the ball removal valve. Since the space between the detector light-receiving portions 56b is blocked, it is detected that the ball removal valve 55 has moved backward. Further, since the back ball passage valve 55b and the front ball passage valve 55c retreat, the game ball falls from the back inflow passage 52a to the back game ball fall path 52c and from the front inflow passage 53a to the front game ball fall path 53c. Fall into

<Operation of game ball take-in device>
In FIG. 14, the game ball rolling in the front inflow passage 53a passes over the front ball passage valve 55c and flows into the front game ball transport body rotation space 53b. The game balls are placed one by one in the recess 54d of the game ball transport body 54 rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and finally fall from the game ball transport body 54 and are detected by the front take-in count switch 58. It is discharged from the ball discharge port 53e. The game balls counted and discharged by the game ball take-in device 19 are returned through the return inclined passage 50 (see FIG. 3) provided in the door-shaped front member 4 and returned to the main body housing 3. It rolls along a passage (not shown) and is discharged to the back of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 (ie, pachinko machine island).

  FIG. 15 is a view showing a state where the ball removal valve 55 is moved to the retracted position by the player's operation and the ball is being removed. Since the behavior of the game ball in the back ball passage member 52 and the behavior of the game ball in the front ball passage member 53 are the same, this embodiment illustrates the behavior of the game ball in the back ball passage member 52.

  When the ball removal valve 55 is moved to the retracted position by the player's operation, the ball removal valve light shielding portion 55a is interposed between the ball removal valve detector light emitting portion 56a and the ball removal valve detector light receiving portion 56b of the ball removal valve detector 56. In order to block, it is detected that the player is performing a ball removal operation. If it is detected that the ball removal operation is being performed, the motor that rotates the motor shaft 62 is stopped even if the game ball transport body 54 is rotating during the take-in operation.

  When the ball removal valve 55 is retreated, the back ball passage valve 55b is retreated, and the subsequent ball falls from the back ball removal passage 52d without newly entering the back game ball transport body rotation space 52b from the back inflow passage 52a. It is discharged without being counted by the back take-in count switch 57. In this case, the game ball is returned to the front side (that is, the player) of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1. By this operation, the game balls arranged in the back inflow passage 52a can be returned. However, the game balls labeled B1 to B5 shown in FIG. 15 remain.

  FIG. 16 is a view showing a state in which the game ball carrier 54 is reversely rotated (clockwise) to discharge the remaining game balls B1 to B5. Since this is an event that continuously occurs from FIG. 15, the behavior of the game ball in the back ball passage member 52 will be exemplified.

  When the operation of the ball removal valve 55 is stopped, the ball removal valve 55 is again moved to the advanced position by the elasticity of the compressed coil spring 61 [see FIG. 13B]. As a result, the ball removal valve light shielding portion 55a does not block between the ball removal valve detector light emitting portion 56a and the ball removal valve detector light receiving portion 56b of the ball removal valve detector 56, so that the operation of the ball removal valve 55 has been stopped. Detected.

  When it is detected that the operation of the ball removal valve 55 is stopped, the game ball transport body 54 starts reverse rotation (rotation in the clockwise direction). As a result, the remaining game balls labeled B1 to B5 are transported in the opposite direction to the time of take-in, fall from the back game ball drop path 52c, and are counted by the back-take-in count switch 57. It is discharged without. Also in this case, the game ball is returned to the front side of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 (that is, the player). Also, as shown in FIG. 16, first, the game balls placed in the recesses 54d of the game ball transport body 54 are returned first, and then the game balls (B4, B4, After B5) is placed in the recess 54d of the game ball transport body 54, it is transported, dropped and returned.

<If there is a missing game ball take-in action>
Next, based on FIG. 17, a case will be described where a missing game ball is to be taken in continuously during the taking-in operation. There are mainly two reasons why the game ball carrier 54 rotates without the game ball being placed in the recess 54d of the game ball carrier 54.

  First, as a first cause, the speed of the game ball in the front inflow passage 53a or the back inflow passage 52a (hereinafter referred to as the inflow passage) is slower than the rotational speed of the game ball transport body 54. That is, before the game ball transport body 54 starts to rotate, the game ball in the inflow passage is stationary at an initial speed of zero. On the other hand, when the game ball transport body 54 starts to rotate, the beginning of the game balls arranged in the inflow passage starts to fall into the recess 54d, thereby starting the movement.

  In the case of a payout device for a pachinko machine, the row of game balls up to the part corresponding to the game ball carrier 54 has a large number of game balls arranged almost vertically, so that the movement can be started immediately by gravity acceleration. . However, since the ball throwing machine 1 of this embodiment is installed on a pachinko machine island that is approximately 10 cm higher than the slot machine that uses medals, the effect display device 15 is installed at a position lower than the slot machine that uses medals. By doing so, the screen of the effect display device 15 can be looked down from the player. As one of the methods for realizing the configuration in which the effect display device 15 is installed at the low position described above, the game ball take-in device 19 should not have a height difference as much as possible, in other words, use a gentle slope in the inflow passage. Yes.

  Since a gentle slope is used in this way, the gravitational acceleration that advances the game ball is a component force in the direction of the slope. Will be significantly reduced. For this reason, when the game ball transport body 54 starts rotating, the game ball transport body 54 may rotate in a state where the game ball does not fall into the recess 54d that should receive the game ball first (that is, missing). is there. This is the first cause of the rotation of the game ball transport body 54 without the game ball being placed in the recess 54d.

  The second cause is that the game ball is repelled when it comes into contact with the concave portion 54d or the convex portion 54e of the game ball carrier 54, and as a result, it collides with the subsequent game ball, and the concave portion 54d of the game ball or the subsequent game ball. It is conceivable that the fall to the hindrance will be hindered.

  Due to the two causes as described above, a state in which a game ball is missing between the game balls B2 and B3 occurs as shown in FIG. In this figure, the game balls B1 and B2 are placed in the recess 54d of the game ball transport body 54 by the previous take-in operation.

<Timing chart when playing ball>
Description will be made based on FIG. FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the game ball taking-in operation, and FIG. 18 (a) is a timing chart in a normal taking-in state as shown in FIG. FIG. 17B is a timing chart in the case where a loss occurs during capture as shown in FIG. 14 and 17 exemplify the behavior of the game ball in the front ball passage member 53, but FIG. 18 shows the behavior of the game balls of both the front ball passage member 53 and the back ball passage member 52. Is shown in the timing chart.

  Each signal shown in the timing charts of FIGS. 18A and 18B will be described (refer to FIG. 11 for various hardware shown below). The proximity switch output indicates the output of the back proximity switch 59 and the front proximity switch 60, and both FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b) indicate that a game ball is detected. That is, it is detected that a certain or higher ball pressure is secured. In the angle detection photo switch 64, detection is performed by the slit 63a of the angle detection plate 63. The count switch output is a signal output that combines both detection signals from the back-in count switch 57 and the front-in count switch 58.

  18 (a) and 18 (b), as an example, it is assumed that the MAX bet button 7 is pushed and 15 game balls are taken in. First, when the MAX bet button 7 is pressed, the proximity switch output is confirmed. If it is confirmed that a ball pressure above a certain level is secured, the drive motor is rotated at a high speed in the direction of taking in the 15 game balls (counterclockwise in FIG. 11) by the necessary angle. . Here, the angle required for taking in 15 game balls is 1 rotation + 1/4 rotation, but for the sake of accuracy, the slit 63a of the angle detection plate 63 is 15 in the angle detection photo switch 64. It is fed back by being detected once. Of course, the position where the angle detection photoswitch 64 detects the slit 63a of the angle detection plate 63 is just the discharge position where the game ball leaves the game ball carrier 54 and starts dropping.

  Since there is a slight drop between the discharge position at which the game ball starts to drop, the back take-in count switch 57, and the front take-in count switch 58, a certain amount of time is required until detection. This is the reason why there is a time difference between the angle detection photoswitch output and the count switch output in FIG. Then, when the game ball carrier 54 is rotated by a necessary angle, the count switch output is monitored for a predetermined wait time (predetermined waiting time), and 15 game balls have been confirmed by the count switch output so far. In this case, the import is completed.

  In contrast to FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b) shows that the game ball transport body 54 rotates without the game ball being placed in the recess 54d of the game ball transport body 54, and the game ball is missing. Shows the case. Basically, the operation of the game ball take-in device 19 is the same until the game ball carrier 54 is rotated at a high speed by a necessary angle. However, in FIG. 18B, an example in which the game ball transport body 54 rotates without the top game ball in the back inflow passage 52a or the front inflow passage 53a being placed on the recess 54d of the game ball transport body 54. Show. The timing at which the count switch output starts is the same as in FIG. 18A, but this is because the game ball already placed in the recess 54d of the game ball transport body 54 has fallen by the previous take-in operation. Yes, if the recess 54d is missing at the start of rotation of the game ball transport body 54, the sixth count switch output is often missing in this embodiment. As a result, after the game ball carrier 54 is rotated, 14 game balls are detected by the predetermined wait time, and one is insufficient.

  If the required number of game balls is not detected even after the predetermined wait time has elapsed, a retry operation is performed. In the present embodiment, the retry operation is performed by rotating the game ball carrier 54 at a low speed by an angle corresponding to the shortage. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 18B, since the shortage is one, it is rotated by 1/12 rotation (that is, until the slit 63a of the next angle detection plate 63 is detected). Thereafter, also in this case, the count switch output is observed until a predetermined wait time. In this example, since one insufficient game ball is output as the count switch output, the capture is completed at this point. As can be seen by comparing FIGS. 18 (a) and (b), the time required for the game ball carrier 54 to rotate at a low speed only by the occurrence of one omission and an extra wait time are required. It becomes.

[In-flight tank configuration]
By the way, as shown in FIG. 3, an in-machine tank 39 interposed between the game ball dispensing device 18 and the storage tray 20 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 4. The game balls paid out from the game ball payout device 18 can be stored inside the main body housing 3. Thereby, it is possible to compensate for the shortage of capacity due to the storage tray body 20 having a one-plate structure, and the game balls are frequently extracted from the storage tray body 20 so as not to overflow, or the game balls are intermittently inserted. Can be prevented.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the in-machine tank 39 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the in-machine tank 39 as viewed from the front upper right, FIG. 20 is a front view of the in-machine tank 39, FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a full tank detection unit in the tank 39. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the in-machine tank 39 fixed to the back side of the discharge port 24 (see FIG. 2) is formed in a hollow shape so that the sphere can be stored therein and the sphere can pass through. It is configured so that approximately 500 spheres can be stored. The in-flight tank 39 has a side surface on one side as a flat surface as a flat portion 71, a side surface on the other side as a circular surface as a circular arc surface portion 72, a top surface as a flat surface as a top surface portion 73, and a bottom surface as a first bottom surface portion 74 and a first surface. Two bottom surface portions 75 are formed in steps, and the front side is opened to form an opening 79. In addition, mounting pieces 77a and 77b are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 79 so as to protrude outward. ) Is fixed with screws.

  The interior of the in-machine tank 39 is formed as a prize ball guiding space 76 for storing and guiding prize balls. A notch opening 78 is formed in a rearward portion of the in-machine tank 39, and the notch opening 78 is fully filled. The tongue detection unit 80 can be detachably mounted. More specifically, the notch opening 78 is cut out across the rear upper portion of the flat surface portion 71, the rear portion of the upper surface portion 73, and the rear portion of the arcuate surface portion 72, and the notch opening 78 is shown in FIG. In this way, the full tank detection unit 80 previously unitized can be mounted from above.

  Here, the full tank detection unit 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The full tank detection unit 80 includes a prize ball opening 82, a side guide plate 83 including a partition wall 84, a swing plate 87, The full tank detection switch 89 is integrated into one unit frame 81. The unit frame 81 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin in a box shape in which adjacent rectangular side surfaces are opened. The prize ball opening 82 is an inlet for taking a prize ball into the prize ball guidance space 76 of the in-flight tank 39 while facing the lower end of a prize ball guidance passage (not shown) formed in the main body housing 3. The unit frame 81 is formed on the upper surface. Further, the side guide plate 83 is integrally formed with the unit frame 81 so as to incline downward toward the arcuate surface portion 72 that is one side of the in-flight tank 39, and from the prize ball opening 82. A main side guide path 85 positioned directly below the prize ball opening 82 so as to guide the received ball to the downstream side, and formed on one side of the main side guide path 85 and directly below the prize ball opening 82. A non-positioned sub-side guide path 86 is formed on the upper surface thereof, and a partition wall 84 having a height substantially the same as the diameter of the sphere is projected between the main side guide path 85 and the sub-side guide path 86. It is installed. Note that the width of the main side guide path 85 is larger than the width of the prize ball opening 82, and the width of the sub side guide path 86 is formed to be about twice the diameter of the sphere. A side plate 83 a standing in the vertical direction is formed integrally with the side guide plate 83 on the side end side of the sub side guide path 86. Since the width dimension of the sub side guide path 86 is formed to be about twice the diameter of the sphere, the amount of balls in the sub side guide path 86 at the time of filling is small. There is almost no occurrence of ball clogging.

  In addition, a swing shaft 88 projects in the horizontal direction above the partition wall 84 and enters the sub-side guide path 86 side, and a shaft formed on the swing shaft 88 at the upper end of the swing plate 87. A cylindrical portion 87c is inserted and provided to be swingable. The swing plate 87 has a circular arc plate 87a projecting on the rear surface side, and a detecting portion 87b is formed projecting from the upper side of the circular arc plate 87a to the upper side. The detection part 87b is such that the protruding part at the upper part of the side enters or exits between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the full light detecting switch 89 of the light projecting / receiving type, and the swinging plate 87 is pressed against the ball In the almost vertical state, the detection unit 87b enters between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit, the full detection switch 89 is turned off, and the tilting state when the swinging plate 87 is pressed by the ball is In this case, the detection unit 87b comes out between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit, and turns the full tank detection switch 89 ON. When the full tank detection switch 89 is turned on, in the present embodiment, the driving of the game ball payout device 18 is stopped, and the ball payout operation is stopped. The lower end of the swing plate 87 is suspended to a position where the ball is pushed and tilted by the ball when the ball jumps over the partition wall 84 and enters the sub-side guide path 86. A guide projection 87d extending rearward from the lower end of 87 is engaged with a guide arc (not shown) formed on the rear side surface of the unit frame 81 to restrict the tilting range.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the bottom surface of the onboard tank 39 is positioned below the side guide plate 83 on the downstream side, and a first bottom surface portion 74 that inclines downward toward the flat surface portion 71 side. A second bottom surface portion 75 that is positioned downstream of the bottom surface portion 74 and is inclined downward toward the opening 79 is formed in a step shape. The height of the step is smaller than the diameter of the sphere and larger than the radius. As described above, the in-machine tank 39 has the side guide plate 83, the first bottom surface portion 74, and the second bottom surface portion 75 formed in a stepped shape, and the received sphere is changed in the step-down direction while changing the flow direction. Since a certain flow path is sequentially guided from the upper stage to the lower stage and guided to the discharge port 24 to the storage tray body 20, the occurrence of clogging in the in-machine tank 39 can be prevented. In particular, when a sphere falls from the main side guide path 85 to the first bottom surface portion 74, the sphere that has jumped out from the main side guide path 85 collides with the inner peripheral surface of the arc surface portion 72, and the first bottom surface is caused by the arc. It is smoothly guided to the front side of the portion 74. Further, in a state where the in-machine tank 39 is fixed to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 4, the opening 79 portion corresponding to the prize ball guiding space 76 is open toward the payout opening 24 to the storage dish body 20. ing. In the illustrated embodiment, the bottom surface portions 74 and 75 are formed in a stepped shape, but the bottom surface portions 74 and 75 may be configured as continuous inclined bottom surfaces.

  In the onboard tank 39 configured as described above, the prize ball opening 82 of the onboard tank 39 is formed on the rear side of the onboard tank 39 on the upstream side of the flow path of the sphere. When it is stored, it is gradually stored from the front side of the in-flight tank 39 on the downstream side. For this reason, for example, when the award ball opening 82 is provided on the front side of the onboard tank 39, a space is created on the rear side inside the onboard tank 39 when the ball is stored, and a large amount of balls are stored. A large amount of spheres can be stored using the space inside the in-flight tank 39 without being impossible. Note that the prize ball opening 82 may not be the upper surface of the in-machine tank 39, but may be, for example, an L-shaped cylindrical channel cylinder protruding from the in-machine tank 39. What is necessary is just to be formed as an opening facing upwards at the upper rear part of the in-machine tank 39.

  In addition, since a partition wall 84 having a height substantially the same as the diameter of the sphere is provided between the main side guide path 85 and the sub side guide path 86, the normal state in which the sphere is stored in the onboard tank 39 is provided. Since the ball received from the prize ball opening 82 flows down the main side guide path 85 and is guided to the downstream side, the ball is provided so as to be swingable above the partition side wall 84 and slightly into the sub side guide path 86 side. It is possible to prevent the full tank detection switch 89 from being turned ON by mistake without swinging the swinging plate 87, and when the ball is clogged up to the position of the side guide plate 83, the partition wall 84, the ball is guided from the main side guide path 85 to the sub side guide path 86 and swings the swinging plate 87 to turn on the full tank detection switch 89, so that the full tank is reliably detected. Can do. Further, since a switch 89 for detecting a full tank is provided in the in-machine tank 39 which is almost sealed, when the switch 89 is turned on, for example, by stopping the paying-out operation of the game ball paying device 18, The internal space of the in-machine tank 39 is not filled with spheres, and this also prevents the occurrence of clogging in the in-machine tank 39.

  On the other hand, even when the full tank state is released, if the ball clogged in the auxiliary side guide path 86, which is less likely to be clogged with balls, is guided downstream along the auxiliary side guide path 86, the swing plate Since 87 returns to the vertical body, the release of the full state can be reliably detected.

  Further, as described above, since one side surface of the in-machine tank 39 is formed in an arc shape as the arc surface portion 72, the sphere guided by the side guide plate 83 can be smoothly guided to the first bottom surface portion 74. Even when the door-shaped front member 4 is opened and closed with respect to the main body housing 3 with the in-machine tank 39 attached to the door-shaped front member 4, the side portion on one side of the rear side of the in-machine tank 39 is The door-shaped front member 4 can be smoothly opened without interfering with the main body housing 3.

(Configuration of door-shaped front member)
The structure of the door-shaped front member 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member 4 as seen from the front upper right, and FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member 4 as seen from the upper left. The door-shaped front member 4 has a frame-shaped resin-made door base member 100, and an upper decoration 102 (described later) provided with a drum window 14 on the front surface of the door base member 100, for a display device. The window portion 16, the operation panel 6, the storage tray body 20, the lower decoration 103, and the like are assembled. In particular, the door base member 100 is divided into three regions (upper, middle, and lower) in the vertical direction, and the upper portion includes a first opening 100a into which the symbol variation display device 13 is inserted from the rear, and the middle portion. A second opening 100b into which the effect display device 15 is fitted is provided, and a lower part is provided with a game ball take-in device 19 and a third opening 100c in which a passage of the game ball is accommodated. Note that a frame-shaped reinforcing metal frame 101 disposed along the outer peripheral edge of the door base member 100 is attached to the back surface of the door base member 100.

[Composition of upper decorations, etc.]
The configuration of the upper decoration 102 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 23 is a perspective view in which the upper decoration 102 in the door-shaped front member 4 is disassembled as viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view in which the upper decoration 102 is disassembled from the upper left rear. 25 is an exploded enlarged perspective view of the plated decoration unit in the upper decoration 102, and FIG. 26 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a mounting state of the plated decoration unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the upper decoration 102 is assembled to the upper part of the door base member 100 and protrudes from the front surface of the door base member 100 to the player side. That is, the longitudinal section in the central portion of the upper ornament 102 is substantially U-shaped, and a reel mounting portion 341 (see FIG. 32) for housing the symbol variation display device 13 is recessed (details will be described later). Has been. A transparent drum window 14 for visually recognizing the symbol variation display device 13 is provided in the central portion of the upper decoration 102, and sound passing through the sound of the speaker 130 (see FIG. 10) is passed on the left and right sides thereof. A hole 105 is formed, and plated decoration units 106 are provided on both ends of the upper decoration 102. In addition, a hook 104 that protrudes toward the player is formed at the upper front end portion of the upper decoration 102. The plated decoration unit 106 is also provided as the lower decoration 103 at the lower corner portion of the door-shaped front member 4. However, since both of the plated decoration units 106 have the same configuration, the plated decoration unit 106 in the upper decoration 102 is used here. Only the plated decoration unit 106 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 25, the plated decoration unit 106 protrudes greatly from the door base member 100 toward the player side, and has a decorative member 107 with a plating film on the surface, and the surface continues to the surface of the decorative member 107. In addition, a colored resin member 108 that forms a substantially arc-shaped curved surface at a corner portion, and an electrical decoration device 109 that is disposed in a space closer to the light emitting substrate 110 than the decorative member 107 and can emit light according to the gaming state. It comprises. It should be noted that the surface of the decorative member 107 and the surface of the colored resin member 108 are exposed portions that can be directly touched by the player, but the transparent lens cover 116 is provided so that the decorating device 109 cannot be touched directly. Covered with.

  The illumination device 109 includes a white first lens body 113a that includes a light emitting source (not shown) such as an LED, a red second lens body 113b that also includes a light emitting source, a first lens body 113a, and a second lens body 113a. A reflection recess 114 having a substantially conical reflection surface 115 that accommodates the lens body 113b and reflects light emitted from the lens bodies 113a and 113b toward the player side is configured. The first lens body 113a has a shape with a cylindrical shape around the periphery and a spherical tip. The first lens body 113a is attached to the lens mounting plate 112 disposed behind the reflective concave portion 114, and is formed in the rear end portion of the reflective concave portion 114. It is arranged on the back side of the reflective recess 114 through the opened opening. The second lens body 113b includes an annular base 113c and four streamlined protrusions 113d that are arranged on the base 113c at equal intervals and protrude forward, and are attached to the lens mounting plate 112. ing. That is, the streamlined protrusion 113d faces the streamlined hole 114a formed in the reflection recess 114 from the outside of the reflection recess 114, and is attached with the light emitting surface exposed to the reflection surface 115 side. Note that the light emission sources built in the first lens body 113a and the second lens body 113b are connected to the light emitting substrate 110 (see FIG. 23), and power is supplied through the light emitting substrate 110. Yes.

  In particular, the decorative member 107 of the present embodiment is formed integrally with the reflective concave portion 114 of the electric decoration device 109, and a plating film is applied to the entire surface. As a result, the reflective surface 115 can be configured by the plating film, and a portion that protrudes greatly from the door base member 100 (that is, the decorative member 107) and a portion that is disposed in the vicinity of the door base member 100 (that is, the reflective recess 114). Can be electrically connected to each other.

  The discharge of the decorative member 107 will be described in detail. If the plated decorative member 107 is disposed on the resin door base member 100 or combined with the colored colored resin member 108, the electrically floating portion, that is, the main body A portion that is not electrically connected to the housing 3 is generated. According to this, noise is generated by discharge due to static electricity, and an electronic component such as a CPU malfunctions or the electronic component is destroyed. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 26, a reinforcing metal frame 101 that is electrically connected to the main body housing 3 is assembled on the rear surface of the door base member 100, and the decorative member is provided. The decorative part forming body formed by integrally forming 107 and the reflective recess 114 is connected to the reinforcing metal frame 101 by a conductive screw 118 screwed from the back side of the reinforcing metal frame 101. For this reason, the decorative member 107 exposed to the front side of the door-shaped front member 4 (that is, a part of the decorative portion forming body) is electrically connected to the main body housing 3 via the conductive screw 118 and the reinforcing metal frame 101. Will be connected. Therefore, even if static electricity is charged on the metal film portion of the decorative member 107, the static electricity is discharged to the main body housing 3 side through the screw 118 and the reinforcing metal frame 101. In particular, by integrally forming the decorative member 107 and the reflective concave portion 114, the decorative portion forming body has a shape extending rearward toward the door base member 100 side, and is screwed from the back side of the reinforcing metal frame 101. The decorative screw 107 and the reinforcing metal frame 101 can be easily connected by the conductive screw 118. The reinforcing metal frame 101 and the door base member 100 have through holes 119 and 120 into which screws 118 can be inserted, and the decorative portion forming body has screw holes 121 into which the screws 118 are screwed. Yes. That is, since the fixing screw 118 is used for conduction, it is possible to discharge the battery with a very simple configuration without taking time and effort.

  The reinforcing metal frame 101 is electrically connected to the main body housing 3 via a metal hinge mechanism 122 (see FIG. 3). For this reason, it becomes possible to discharge the static electricity charged on the door-shaped front member 4 side to the main body housing 3 side regardless of the open / closed state of the door-shaped front member 4. Further, since electrical conduction is performed using an existing member called the hinge mechanism 122, a discharge path can be formed without increasing the manufacturing cost.

[Configuration of the symbol variation display device]
Next, the configuration of the symbol variation display device 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the symbol variation display device 13 as viewed from the front upper right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the symbol variation display device 13 as viewed from the rear upper right, and FIG. 29 illustrates the symbol variation display device 13. 30 is a perspective view of the disassembled state viewed from the front upper right, FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the disassembled state of the symbol reel as viewed from the front upper right, and FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the disassembled state of the symbol reel as viewed from the rear upper right. 32 is a perspective view of the reel mounting portion as viewed from above the rear side, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the reel mounting portion as viewed from below the back side, and FIG. 34 is mounted on the symbol variation display device 13. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the made reel mounting part.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the symbol variation display device 13 is a reel rotation type display device, and can be rotated individually, for example, three symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c (hereinafter referred to as each symbol reel 301), Each of the symbol reels 301 has a device case 302 that incorporates and accommodates each symbol reel 301, and a game is played with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surface of the symbol display section 300 of each symbol reel 301. .

  As shown in FIG. 29, the device case 302 includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, a right side plate 306, a left side plate 307, and a partially arc-shaped rear plate 308 that covers the rear surface. It is an enclosed box shape, and a part of the arc of the symbol display unit 300 protrudes from the front of the apparatus case 302. In addition, as for the device case 302, only the bottom part board 304 is formed with the metal plate, and the other part is formed with resin.

  In addition, a plurality of screw holes 302a, into which screws 313a and 313b for fixing the symbol reels 301 are screwed, are formed on the front edge of the device case 302 at predetermined intervals. The lower screw 313b is a normal male screw, but a tapping screw is used for the upper screw 313a because the object to be screwed is a resin molded product.

  A cover body 309 is assembled on the front side of the device case 302. The cover body 309 is constructed between a frame-shaped frame portion 310 formed along the front edge of the device case 302 and the upper and lower ends of the frame portion 310, and each symbol reel 301 incorporated in the device case 302. It is comprised from the partition part 311 arrange | positioned at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction so that it may partition. In addition, the front surface of the partition part 311 is formed in a substantially arc shape so that the center part in the vertical direction protrudes most toward the player side. That is, the gap between the symbol reels 301 is closed from the front, and is formed in an arc shape so as to be a continuous surface with respect to the circumferential surface of the symbol display unit 300. The partitioning portions 311 arranged on the left and right sides are integrally formed with shielding portions 311a that shield the mechanisms in the symbol reels 301a and 301c on both sides from the left and right outer sides. In addition, mounting holes 312 through which screws 313a and 313b can be inserted are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the partition part 311 in the frame part 310.

  As shown in FIG. 28, a reel board 315 covered with a board case 314 is disposed on the left side plate 307 of the apparatus case 302, and each symbol reel 301 is driven by a driving signal relayed by the reel board 315. The drive is controlled individually. The reel substrate 315 is provided with four types of connectors 316a, 316b, 316c, and 316d that protrude through the opening of the substrate case 314. Via the connector 316a that protrudes from the lower left side of the substrate case 314, A signal for driving and controlling each symbol reel 301 is input, and a detection signal sent from a photosensor 325 accommodated in each symbol reel 301 is output to the main control board 400. The three connectors 316b protruding from the upper surface of the substrate case 314 are connected to connectors (not shown) connected to a backlight 322 described later and wired through a through hole 308a formed in the rear plate 308. It has become. In other words, the power source for operation is applied to the backlight 322 via these connectors 316b. This operating power is supplied to the reel substrate 315 via a connector 316d provided at the center of the left side surface of the substrate case 314. In addition, the three connectors 316c protruding from the bottom surface of the substrate case 314 are connected to a connector 317 provided on the relay plate 326 described later (three connectors 317 protruding from the rear plate 308 of the device case 302). (Not shown), and connected to the reel motors 321 accommodated in the symbol reels 301, and can receive detection signals from the photosensor 325.

  The harness with a connector includes one or a plurality of electric wires having different covering colors for each symbol reel 301, and each of the backs accommodated in each symbol reel 301. The light 322 is connected to an electric wire having the same color as that of the electric wire included in the harness with connector. That is, the color of the harness and the electric wire is set to be different for each symbol reel 301. According to this, it is possible to perform color matching between a harness including an electric wire that supplies electric power to the reel motor 321 and an electric wire that receives a detection signal from the photosensor 325, and an electric wire that supplies electric power to the backlight 322. In addition, it becomes easy to collate the electric wire with each symbol reel 301 (that is, confirm whether or not there is a miswiring), and the arrangement position of each symbol reel 301 can be confirmed based on the color of the electric wire. That is, in the assembling process of the ball throwing spinning machine 1, the arrangement order of the left, middle and right symbol reels 301 is an extremely important item that should not be mistaken, but by changing the color of the wires in this way Thus, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the above arrangement has been performed correctly, and the quality of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 can be ensured. Further, the length of the electric wire is different for each symbol reel 301, and it is possible to visually recognize an error in the arrangement of the symbol reels 301 depending on the length of the electric wire.

  In addition, a U-shaped slit 333 that penetrates the left side plate 307 is formed above the substrate case 314 in the left side plate 307. It is possible to bind together with the plate 307. In particular, since the latching portion 333a having only the lower end connected by the roll-shaped U-shaped slit 333 opened at the lower side is integrally formed with the left side plate 307, the latching portion 333a is bent in a state where a part of the binding band is bent. If it is inserted above, it becomes possible to hook the binding band to the latching portion 333a very easily. That is, in order to hook the binding band to the left side plate 307, in the case where two holes are drilled in the left side plate 307, the tip of the binding band must be inserted through the two holes in order, Although the bundling work may be difficult, if the U-shaped slit 333 is provided, the electric wire can be hooked from the upper side of the hooking portion 333a, and workability is improved. In addition, it is conceivable to form the hook so as to protrude outward from the left side plate 307, but this is not preferable because the configuration becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost such as the mold cost becomes high.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, each symbol reel 301 arranged in the device case 302 rotates an annular symbol display unit 300 having a symbol row displayed on the peripheral surface, and each symbol display unit 300. A reel motor 321 for supporting and applying a rotational force, a motor mounting plate 320 disposed on the right side of the symbol display unit 300 for fixing the reel motor 321, and being fixedly attached to the motor mounting plate 320, A substantially arc-shaped backlight 322 is provided that is disposed along the inner surface of the unit 300, particularly along the surface on the player side, and emits light to the player side through the symbol display unit 300.

  More specifically, the reel motor 321 is a DC step motor that can rotate forward and backward, and a flange 323 is fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 329. The flange 323 is a substantially disk-like member, and a fitting part 323a notched in a radial direction is formed on a part of the circumferential surface, and a protrusion 323b provided with a male screw part on the circumferential surface. Is formed. Correspondingly, the symbol display unit 300 has a right side surface (a rear surface in FIG. 31) generally open, but a left side surface (a front surface in FIG. 31) has a substantially cross shape. The side member 330 is provided so that the flange 323 of the reel motor 321 can be attached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the central portion of the side member 330 has a through hole 330 a through which the protrusion 323 b of the flange 323 is inserted, and a circular housing portion 330 b that can accommodate the flange 323 inside. In particular, as shown in FIG. 30, the circular accommodating portion 330 b protrudes toward the inside of the symbol display portion 300 and can be fitted to the fitting portion 323 a of the flange 323 to prevent rotation. 330c is formed. A lock screw 324 is screwed into a protrusion 323b that passes through the through-hole 330a and protrudes outward from the circular housing portion 330b, whereby the flange 323 of the reel motor 321 is engaged with the side member 330 of the symbol display portion 300. Mounted in a fixed state. That is, the rotation shaft 329 of the reel motor 321 is directly connected to the side member 330 of the symbol display unit 300. In addition, since the symbol display unit 300 is fixed on the axis by the lock screw 324, a force in the diametrical direction does not act, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation shaft 329 from blurring.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the motor mounting plate 320 is formed of a metal plate, and includes a motor mounting portion 320a for mounting the reel motor 321 and a light mounting portion 320b for mounting the backlight 322. Yes. A mounting piece 320c bent in the vertical direction is formed on the front side (player side) of the upper and lower ends of the motor mounting plate 320, and penetrates in the front-rear direction substantially at the center of the mounting piece 320c. A through hole 320d is formed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 29, these through holes 320 d are provided at positions that coincide with the mounting holes 312 formed in the cover body 309 and the screw holes 302 a formed in the apparatus case 302 in the front-rear direction. . That is, from the front of the cover body 309, the screws 313 a and 313 b are screwed into the screw holes 302 a of the apparatus case 302 through the mounting holes 312 of the cover body 309 and the through holes 320 d of the motor mounting plate 320. On the other hand, the motor mounting plate 320 and the cover body 309 are assembled in a fixed state. That is, the cover body 309 and the motor mounting plate 320 are fastened together with the device case 302. For this reason, compared with what fixes the cover body 309 and the motor attachment plate 320 separately with respect to the apparatus case 302, while reducing a work process, three members, ie, the cover body 309, the motor attachment plate 320, and an apparatus. The mutual positioning in the case 302 can be performed accurately and easily. As a result, the clearance of the cover 309 with respect to each symbol reel 301 can be reduced, and the gap between the symbol reels 301 can be closed with high accuracy. In other words, the internal structure of the device case 302 can be made more difficult to see, and deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

  Further, an extended lower portion 320e extending rearward is formed on the lower rear end side of the motor mounting plate 320, and a relay plate 326 is formed at a corner portion formed by the extended lower portion 320e and the motor mounting portion 320a. Is installed. The relay plate 326 relays an electric wire (not shown) connected to the reel motor 321, an electric wire (not shown) connected to the photo sensor 325, and a harness with a connector (not shown) connected to the reel substrate 315. The connector 317 (see FIG. 28) and the like are mounted. An extension upper part 320g extending in the same direction as the extension lower part 320e is formed on the upper rear end side of the motor mounting plate 320. The extension upper part 320g is connected to the backlight 322. A groove portion (not shown) for guiding an electric wire (not shown) and an electric wire presser 327 for preventing the electric wire wired in the groove portion from deviating from the groove portion are provided. The wire retainer 327 is made of a transparent and elastically deformable thin plate-like resin member, and one end thereof is fixed by a screw 327a. In this way, by holding the electric wire in an appropriate position by the cooperation of the groove portion and the electric wire presser 327, the floating state of the electric wire can be prevented without providing a substrate such as the relay plate 326. It can be avoided that the rotation of each symbol reel 301 becomes an obstacle and the electric wire is caught in the rotation. A bundling member 328 that holds the electric wires connected to the reel motor 321 and the electric wires connected to the backlight 322 in a state of being collected is attached to the motor attachment plate 320 in front of the electric wire presser 327.

  An attachment piece 320f having an L-shaped cross section is erected on the rear side of the center of the motor attachment plate 320 so as to support the photosensor 325. The photosensor 325 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that face each other, and outputs a signal according to whether light emitted from the light emitting unit reaches the light receiving unit. Then, as shown in FIG. 30, on the inner surface side of the side member 330 in the symbol display unit 300, light shielding that passes between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the photosensor 325 every time the symbol display unit 300 rotates once. A piece 331 protrudes inward. That is, every time the reel 301 is rotated once, the light emitted from the light emitting unit is shielded and a signal corresponding to the light is output.

  By the way, since the light shielding piece 331 blocks light emitted from the light emitting portion, it is preferably formed of an opaque member, for example, a black member. On the other hand, the side member 330 of the symbol display portion 300 is a symbol display. Since it is formed integrally with the portion 300, it is preferably formed from a light transmissive member, for example, a transparent member. For this reason, the light shielding piece 331 and the side member 330 cannot be integrally formed, and means for attaching the light shielding piece 331 to the side member 330 is required. However, in the case of attaching through a fastening member such as a screw, the center of gravity of the entire symbol display unit 300 including the light shielding piece 331 is decentered from the rotation axis, and the rotation speed of the symbol display unit 300 may be uneven. There is. Further, when the light shielding piece 331 is bonded with an adhesive, it is difficult to position the light shielding piece 331 with respect to the side member 330, and as a result, the rotational position of the symbol display unit 300 may not be accurately detected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the light shielding piece 331 is formed by insert molding. That is, the light-shielding piece 331 and the side member 330 are integrally formed by placing a previously formed light-shielding piece 331 in a mold and injection-molding the symbol display unit 300 and the side member 330. According to this, it can be formed relatively easily and the positioning accuracy of the light shielding piece 331 with respect to the side member 330 can be increased.

  The backlight 322 has a substantially arc-like appearance, and two LEDs 322a arranged at a predetermined interval are provided on the side of the motor mounting plate 320 that contacts the light mounting portion 320b toward the side member 330 side. It is arranged to emit light. Further, on the inner surface side of the symbol display unit 300, a white reflecting portion 322b that reflects light emitted from each LED 322a toward the symbol row (not shown) of the symbol display unit 300 is formed. For this reason, it is possible to cause surface emission inside the symbol display unit 300, and it is possible to illuminate the symbols located on the player side, particularly three symbols, with substantially uniform light by substantially uniform light. .

  By the way, the symbol variation display device 13 of the present embodiment is mounted on the reel mounting portion 341 (see FIG. 32) recessed in the door-shaped front member 4 in a state of being fitted from the rear. In particular, in order to reduce the number of assembling steps of the ball throwing spinning machine 1, the symbol variation display device 13 is mounted on the reel mounting portion 341 by one touch. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 34, the bottom plate 304 of the apparatus case 302 is formed with two lower protruding pieces 352 suspended from the lower surface at a predetermined interval. On the top plate 305 of 302, two upper protruding pieces 353 standing from the upper surface are formed at a predetermined interval. In contrast, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the reel mounting portion 341 of the door-shaped front member 4 faces the lower protruding piece 352 when the symbol variation display device 13 is accommodated in the reel mounting portion 341. A mounting portion 351 having a groove portion 350 is formed at a position where the lower protruding piece 352 can be inserted into the groove portion 350. Further, on the ceiling surface of the reel mounting portion 341, an engaging portion 354 that can be engaged with the upper protruding piece 353 when the symbol variation display device 13 is accommodated in the reel mounting portion 341 is provided. The engaging portion 354 is between an engaging position at which it can engage with the upper protruding piece 353 and a non-contact position that does not contact the upper protruding piece 353 when the symbol variation display device 13 is inserted into and removed from the reel mounting portion 341. Is supported by a screw 355 so as to slide in the left-right direction. For this reason, when the symbol variation display device 13 is mounted on the reel mounting portion 341, first, the lower protruding piece 352 suspended from the lower surface of the bottom plate 304 is formed into a slit-shaped groove 350 formed on the reel mounting portion 341. Then, the whole is inserted into the reel mounting portion 341 while rotating the symbol variation display device 13 around the lower protruding piece 352. Then, the upper protruding piece 353 of the device case 302 is inserted to the back without contacting the engaging portion 354. Thereafter, when the engaging portion 354 is slid from the non-contact position to the engaging position, the upper protruding piece 353 is positioned on the take-out side of the engaging portion 354 and is in an engaged state. That is, the deviation of the symbol variation display device 13 is restricted.

  When the symbol variation display device 13 is taken out from the reel mounting portion 341, the engaging portion 354 is slid from the engaging position to the non-contact position. Then, the restriction state of the upper protruding piece 353 is released, and the symbol variation display device 13 can be rotated to the take-out side around the lower protruding piece 352. Note that the lower projection piece 352 can be removed from the groove 350 formed in the reel mounting portion 341 by rotating the symbol variation display device 13 to the take-out side and lifting the symbol variation display device 13. .

  By the way, in order to mount the symbol variation display device 13 with one touch as described above, since the dimensional accuracy of the device case 302 and the reel mounting portion 341 of the symbol variation display device 13 is required, resin is used as a main material. It is preferred that On the other hand, the motor mounting plate 320 for fixing the reel motor 321 is a sheet metal member, that is, a metal plate so that the reel motor 321 can be supported firmly and stably. However, due to the combination of the resin reel mounting portion 341 that is an insulating member and the motor mounting plate 320 that is a conductor, an electrically floating portion, that is, a portion that is not electrically connected to the housing or the like may be present. According to this, noise is generated by discharge due to static electricity, and there is a possibility that electronic components such as a CPU malfunction or the electronic components are destroyed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the bottom plate 304 of the apparatus case 302 is a conductive metal plate, and the motor mounting plate 320 in each symbol reel 301 is in contact with the bottom plate 304 as shown in FIG. A case-side contact piece 343 is provided. That is, the bottom plate 304 and all the motor mounting plates 320 are in a conductive state. Further, on the motor mounting plate 320, when the symbol variation display device 13 is mounted on the reel mounting portion 341, the door-side contact that contacts the ground contact piece 342 (see FIG. 33) disposed on the back side of the reel mounting portion 341. A piece 344 is provided. Here, since the ground contact piece 342 is electrically connected to the main body housing 3, the motor mounting plate 320 including the door side contact piece 344 is attached to the main body housing 3 via the ground contact piece 342. Conducted. In addition, other motor mounting plates 320 that are not in direct contact with the ground contact piece 342 are also brought into conduction through the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302. Therefore, when static electricity is charged in any of the symbol reels 301, it is possible to discharge to the main body housing 3 side through the respective motor mounting plates 320 and the ground contact pieces 342.

  The ground contact piece 342 arranged on the back side of the reel mounting portion 341 is made of an elastic member formed by bending a thin metal plate. When the symbol variation display device 13 is mounted on the reel mounting portion 341, the door side contact is made. It is pressed by the piece 344 and elastically deformed. Therefore, the door-side contact piece 344 can be brought into pressure contact with the ground contact piece 342 and reliably contacted. Further, since the ground contact piece 342 is elastically deformed, the ground contact piece 342 and the door side contact piece 344 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, the case-side contact piece 343 also serves as an attachment piece 320c for fixing the lower side of the motor attachment plate 320, and a plurality of pieces bent upward from the front edge of the bottom plate 304 are provided. It abuts on the contacted piece 345. Accordingly, surface contact can be achieved, and the contact area can be increased. Moreover, since the motor mounting plate 320 is fixed to the device case 302 by fastening the case side contact piece 343 and the contacted piece 345 with the mounting screw 313b, the contact between the case side contact piece 343 and the contacted piece 345 is made. In addition to being able to maintain the state, even if there is a gap between the case-side contact piece 343 and the contacted piece 345, it can be conducted through the conductive mounting screw 313b.

  Moreover, since the attachment piece 320c for fixing the upper side of the motor attachment plate 320 is used as the door-side contact piece 344, a portion for contacting the ground contact piece 342 is configured without complicating the configuration. can do.

  33, the reinforcing metal frame 101 attached to the rear surface of the door-shaped front member 4 is in contact with the ground contact piece 342, and the door-shaped front member 4 is rotated with respect to the main body housing 3. Since the reinforcing metal frame 101 and the main body housing 3 are electrically connected via a hinge mechanism 122 that is movably supported, the interior of the symbol variation display device 13 is maintained regardless of the open / closed state of the door-shaped front member 4. It becomes possible to discharge the static electricity charged in the main body housing 3. Further, since electrical conduction is performed using existing members, a discharge path can be formed without increasing the manufacturing cost.

[Configuration of control board and setting device]
Configurations of various control boards and setting devices will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 35 to 40. Here, FIG. 8 is a rear view of the door-shaped front member 4 as viewed from the rear side, FIG. 35 is a perspective view of the main body case 3 as viewed from the upper left front, and FIG. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled state of the main body housing 3 as viewed from the front upper right, and FIG. 38 is an enlarged partial front view of the main body housing 3. 39 is a perspective view of the main body housing 3 in a state in which the setting cover is opened, and FIG. 40 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main part in the vicinity of the setting cover.

  As shown in FIG. 8, on the back side of the door-shaped front member 4, the sub-board 360 that executes the effect processing according to the gaming state based on the command transmitted from the main control board 400 and the effect display device 15 are driven. A plurality of substrates such as a liquid crystal driving substrate 361 and a lamp driving substrate 363 for controlling the illumination device 109 and the like are arranged, and the sub substrate 360 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 361 are accommodated in the first substrate case 362, and the lamp driving substrate 363 is accommodated in a second substrate case 364 arranged in parallel with the first substrate case 362. In addition, on the upper side of the second substrate case 364, a projecting member 420 that protrudes toward the rear (the body housing 3 side) is formed integrally with the second substrate case 364, as will be described in detail later. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35, a main control board 400 and a payout control board 402 are accommodated in the main body housing 3 as control boards. The main control board 400 controls the entire game, and controls the driving of the game ball take-in device 19 and the rotation / stop of the symbol variation display device 13 based on the operation of various operation buttons and levers on the operation panel 6. Together with the lottery. Further, the payout control board 402 controls the game ball payout device 18 in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control board 400. The main control board 400 is housed in the main board case 401, and the payout control board 402 is housed in the payout board case 403 and sealed. Further, with respect to the main control board 400, a seal seal (not shown) that prohibits the opening of the main board case 401 is a seal attached to the front lower end portion of the main board case 401 and the main body housing 3 so as to prevent unauthorized operation. It is stuck across the sticking plate 415. In particular, the seal sticking plate 415 is fixed to the inner surface of the rear plate of the main body housing 3 with screws (not shown) so that it cannot be removed without removing the main board case 401 from the main body housing 3. Here, the main control board 400 corresponds to the game control means of the present invention.

  In addition, the main substrate case 401 and the payout substrate case 403 are both transparent resin so that the presence or absence of fraudulent acts such as attachment of illegal electronic components can be easily recognized with respect to the main control board 400 and the payout control board 402. Formed from. Further, in the present embodiment, a part of the back surface of the main body housing 3 is transparent so that the presence or absence of fraudulent activity can be visually recognized also on the solder surface (back surface) side of the main control board 400 or the payout control board 402. . Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, a large rectangular opening 404a is formed at the center of the back surface of the main body housing 3, and the main body housing is closed so as to close the opening 404a. A transparent transparent plate 405 is attached from within the body 3 by screws 406. In addition, reinforcing members 407 arranged in a bracing manner are formed integrally with the transparent plate 405 on the front surface of the transparent plate 405 to reinforce the strength of the transparent plate 405, as well as the main board case 401 and the payout board case 403. The distance between the transparent plate 405 and the transparent plate 405 is kept constant.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38, the main control board 400 is provided with a setting operation unit 408 for changing the payout rate (ratio of the payout number with respect to the input number) in stages. The probability can be set to any one of setting 1 to setting 6, for example. Specifically, the setting operation unit 408 includes a setting change switch 409 that can be pressed and a locking unit 410 that electrically disables the pressing operation of the setting change switch 409 and presses the setting change switch 409. The set value is switched every time, and the lowest payout rate is set at setting 1 (set value is 1), and the highest payout rate is set at setting 6 (set value is 6).

  By the way, since the setting operation unit 408 is used relatively frequently, it is necessary to dispose at least the front end portion (pressing portion) of the setting change switch 409 from the main board case 401. However, according to this, there is a concern that the setting change switch 409 is illegally operated. For example, a piano wire or the like is inserted from a gap formed between the main body housing 3 and the door-shaped front member 4, and the setting is changed to be advantageous to the player by hooking the piano wire or the like on the setting change switch 409. There is a possibility of cheating.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a setting cover 412 that covers the setting operation unit 408 is provided. As shown in FIG. 39, the setting cover 412 includes a first cover portion 417a that covers the locking portion 410 and a second cover portion 417b that covers the setting change switch 409, and is formed on the upper end side. The shaft portion 413 is supported so as to be rotatable. A button-shaped panel fastener 418 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) for fixing the setting cover 412 in the closed state is provided on the upper side of the first cover portion 417a. Further, slides that are disposed on the left and right sides of the setting cover 412 on the ceiling surface of the main body housing 3 and support the shaft portion 413 of the setting cover 412 in a inserted state, and have a groove portion extending rearward. A member 414 is provided. For this reason, when the setting change switch 409 is operated, if the button-shaped panel fastener 418 is pulled and the setting cover 412 is flipped up around the shaft portion 413, the setting operation portion 408 is opened, and the setting change switch 409 is opened. Can be pressed. Since the slide member 414 is provided, the setting cover 412 that is flipped up is slid rearward so that the setting cover 412 is held in a state of protruding forward as shown in FIG. It is possible to operate the setting change switch 409 in a state where the button is released.

  However, even when the setting operation unit 408 is covered with the setting cover 412 and the button-shaped panel fastener 418 for maintaining the closed state of the setting cover 412 is provided, an unauthorized operation tool such as a piano wire is used. There is a considerable possibility that the setting cover 412 is opened and the setting operation unit 408 is illegally operated. Although it is possible to provide a locking device on the setting cover 412 so that the setting cover 412 cannot be opened unless it is a legitimate operation with a key, this makes the normal setting change operation extremely troublesome. The burden on the responsible person will increase.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 40, a protruding member 420 that protrudes rearward from the second substrate case 364 mounted on the back side of the door-shaped front member 4 is provided, and the door-shaped When the front member 4 is closed, the projecting member 420 is positioned in the vicinity of the front surface of the setting cover 412 to prevent the setting cover 412 from being opened, thereby preventing unauthorized operation of the setting operation unit 408. That is, when the door-shaped front member 4 is closed, the protruding member 420 is disposed in the vicinity of the setting cover 412 to prevent an unauthorized operation tool such as a piano wire from entering the setting operation unit 408. When the door-shaped front member 4 is opened, the projecting member 420 rotates together with the door-shaped front member 4, so that the setting operation unit 408 can be operated away from the vicinity of the setting cover 412. That is, fraudulent acts can be prevented, and the burden on the operator can be reduced without hindering regular setting change operations.

  The protruding length of the protruding member 420 is set so that a slight gap is formed between the setting cover 412 and the protruding member 420 when the door-shaped front member 4 is closed. In other words, even if the door-shaped front member 4 is closed, the setting cover 412 and the protruding member 420 are set so as not to contact each other. Therefore, even when the door-shaped front member 4 is closed vigorously or when the protruding length of the protruding member 420 is slightly longer due to a design error or the like, the setting cover 412 and the protruding member 420 Can be prevented, and the setting cover 412 or the protruding member 420 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, since the second substrate case 364 that accommodates the lamp driving substrate 363 is provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 4, the second substrate case 364 is closed when the door-shaped front member 4 is closed. On the other hand, when the door-shaped front member 4 is opened, the second substrate case 364 rotates together with the door-shaped front member 4 and protrudes from the main body housing 3. It becomes. Therefore, the second substrate case 364 and the main substrate case 401 can be efficiently accommodated in the main body housing 3 and the wiring work for the main control substrate 400 and the lamp driving substrate 363 can be easily performed. Become. Further, since the projecting member 420 is formed on the rear surface of the second substrate case 364, when the door-shaped front member 4 is closed, the projecting member 420 prevents unauthorized operation on the setting operation unit 408. In addition, the closed state of the second substrate case 364 can be maintained. That is, it is possible to prevent an illegal act on the lamp driving substrate 363. Since the projecting member 420 is formed integrally with the second substrate case 364, the attaching process of the projecting member 420 is not necessary, and the positioning of the projecting member 420 with respect to the setting cover 412 is facilitated. Moreover, since the protruding member 420 cannot be removed, the crime prevention effect is further enhanced.

[Configuration of locking device]
Next, the configuration of the locking device 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3, 35, 36, and 41 to 49. Here, FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the locking device 123 as seen from the front upper right, FIG. 42 is a perspective view of the locking device 123 as seen from the upper left, and FIG. 43 shows the mechanism of the main part of the locking device 123 in the rear. 44 is an enlarged perspective view as seen from the upper left, FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the state where the locking device 123 is disassembled as seen from the upper left, FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the cylinder lock and the locking mechanism, and FIG. FIG. 47 is a rear view of the main part of the locking device, FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operating state of the locking mechanism in the locking device 123, and FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the release of the locking mechanism; FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a holding state at the unlocking position of the door operating rod.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the side frame portion 550 on the free end side of the main body housing 3 is provided with a set of locking devices 123, and the main body with respect to the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 2). Locking the housing 3 in the closed position and locking the door-shaped front member 4 to the main body housing 3 in the closed position, that is, preventing the opening operation of the main body housing 3 and the door-shaped front member 4. It is possible. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 41, 42, and 44, the locking device 123 is a long mounting base that is fixedly mounted to the side frame 550 on the free end side of the main body housing 3. 500, and a main body frame operating rod 503 and a door operating rod 507 supported to be slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting base 500. The main body frame operating rod 503 is for locking the main body housing 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is provided with two main body frame locking hooks 502 that can be engaged with and disengaged from a locking tool 501 formed on the outer frame 2. Have one. On the other hand, the door operating rod 507 is for locking the door-shaped front member 4 with respect to the main body housing 3, and is engaged with a locking tool 505 (see FIG. 3) formed on the door-shaped front member 4. Three removable door locking hooks 506 are provided. The main body frame operating rod 503 has the lower side as the locking position and the upper side as the unlocking position, while the door operating rod 507 has the upper side as the locking position and the lower side as the releasing position, and the locking position and the unlocking position, respectively. And is supported to slide between. That is, it is possible to remove the main body frame locking hook 502 and the door locking hook 506 from the locking members 501 and 505 by sliding the main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 in the opposite directions.

  The main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 are biased in the locking direction by a first elastic member 508 and a second elastic member 509, respectively. In the present embodiment, one coil spring is also used as the first elastic member 508 and the second elastic member 509. That is, both ends of the coil spring are formed at a position lower than the latching claws 508a formed on the main body frame operating rod 503 and the latching claws 509a formed on the door operating rod 507 (lower than the latching claws 508a). The main body frame operating rod 503 is biased downward (that is, the locking direction), and the door operating rod 507 is biased upward (that is, the locking direction). That is, the first elastic member 508 and the second elastic member 509 are held in the locked position.

  On the other hand, a cylinder lock 515 is provided which can slide the main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 in the unlocking direction by inserting a key (not shown) into the keyhole and rotating the key. It has been. That is, the cylinder lock 515 includes a main body cam piece 517 that can be engaged with the engaging groove 516 of the main body frame operating rod 503 by rotating the key in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise), and the key in the reverse direction. And a door cam piece 519 that can be engaged with the engaging groove 518 of the door operating rod 507 by rotating in the counterclockwise direction (for example, counterclockwise). Can be slid in the unlocking direction (upward), and the door operating rod 507 can be slid in the unlocking direction (downward) by the door cam piece 519.

  The main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 are formed with a concave main body frame notch 523 and a door notch 524 that are notched in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction. The two notches 523 and 524 are aligned with each other when the hook 503 and the door operating hook 507 are both in the locked position, and at least one of the main body frame operating hook 503 and the door operating hook 507 is in the unlocked position. Will not match.

  In the present embodiment, a lock mechanism 526 for locking the main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 at the locking position is provided. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the lock mechanism 526 is inserted into the two notches 523 and 524 when the main body frame notch 523 and the door notch 524 are aligned with each other. A lock claw portion 527 for restricting the sliding (moving in the unlocking direction) of the operating rod 507, and a main body frame cutout 523 and a door cutout 524 supported so as to be rotatable around a shaft portion 528s (see FIG. 43). On the other hand, a lock rotation member 528 for detachably disengaging the lock claw portion 527, a third elastic member 529 (see FIG. 43) for urging the lock claw portion 527 in a direction of coming out of the two notches 523 and 524, and an outer A lock operation piece 530 that urges the lock claw portion 527 in the insertion direction against the third elastic member 529 by pressing the lock rotation member 528 when the main body housing 3 is closed with respect to the frame 2; Equipped with It is. The third elastic member 529 is formed of a coil spring, one end of which is hooked on a hooking claw 500a formed on the mounting base 500, and the other end is hooked on a hooking hole 530a formed on the upper portion of the lock operation piece 530. The lock rotation member 528 is urged counterclockwise in the drawing.

  According to this, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the main body housing 3 is locked to the outer frame 2 and the door-shaped front member 4 is locked to the main body housing 3. Since the main body frame cutout 523 and the door cutout 524 coincide with each other and the lock rotating member 528 is pressed by the lock operation piece 530, the lock claw portion is formed inside the main body frame cutout 523 and the door cutout 524. 527 is inserted, and the main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 are locked in the locked position. Therefore, in this state, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the main body frame locking hook 502 or the door locking hook 506, the main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 cannot be slid, and the locked state is changed. Retained.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the main body housing 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 are both locked even if they are in the locked position. The slide of the main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 is not restricted by the claw portion 527. This is because although the main body frame cutout 523 and the door cutout 524 coincide with each other, the lock operation piece 530 does not come into contact with the wall H of the outer frame 2, and the lock rotation member 528 is pressed by the lock operation piece 530. This is because the lock rotation member 528 is rotated by the urging force of the third elastic member 529 and the lock claw portion 527 comes out of the two notches 523 and 524. In this way, when the main body housing 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the locked state is released so that the main body frame operating rod 503 is not slid to the unlocked position (that is, the key of the cylinder lock 515). Even when the main body casing 3 is closed without rotating the main body casing 3 in the clockwise direction, it is possible to prevent the main body frame locking hook 502 and the outer frame locking tool 501 engaged therewith from being damaged. That is, if the main body housing 3 is closed in a locked state, the main body frame locking hook 502 is not displaced at all, and the main body frame locking hook 502 at the locking position and the locking tool 501 of the outer frame 2 collide. The main body frame locking hook 502 may be bent. However, if the lock state is released as in the present embodiment, the main body frame locking hook 502 is brought into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame locking hook 502 is brought into contact with the outer frame 2. The locking hook 502 can be temporarily displaced toward the unlocking side, and damage to the main body frame locking hook 502 and the like can be suppressed. In other words, the main housing 3 can be closed without operating the cylinder lock 515.

  In the present invention, a lock release mechanism 540 for releasing the lock state of the lock mechanism 526 by operating the cylinder lock 515 is provided. As shown in FIG. 45, the unlocking mechanism 540 includes a main body frame sliding contact surface 542 and a door sliding contact surface 543 formed on the lock rotation member 528. The main body frame sliding contact surface 542 is a surface with which the main body cam piece 517 is slidably contacted before the main body frame operating rod 503 is slid in the unlocking direction, and the main body cam piece 517 is connected to the main body frame sliding contact surface 542. (Ie, when the key is rotated clockwise in the cylinder lock 515), the lock rotation member 528 is rotated to force the lock claw portion 527 from the body frame cutout 523 and the door cutout 524. (See FIG. 48B). Similarly, the door sliding contact surface 543 is a surface on which the door cam piece 519 is slidably contacted before the door operating rod 507 is slid in the unlocking direction, and the door cam piece 519 is connected to the door sliding contact surface 543. (Ie, when the key is turned counterclockwise in the cylinder lock 515), the lock turning member 528 is turned to force the lock claw portion 527 from the body frame cutout 523 and the door cutout 524. To escape. In other words, even when any of the operating rods 503 and 507 are slid in the unlocking direction, the lock claw portion 527 comes out of the two notches 523 and 524 before the operation, and the sliding of the operating rods 503 and 507 is performed. It becomes possible. In this way, when unlocking with a regular operation, the lock mechanism 526 is automatically released, so that unauthorized operations can be prevented without imposing a burden on the operator or the like.

  In addition, two members that slide in opposite directions, that is, the main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 are locked by a set of lock mechanisms 526 and locked by operating the lock rotating member 528. Therefore, the lock mechanism 526 can be reduced in size and thickness.

  The main body cam piece 517 can be engaged only with the main body frame operating rod 503, and the door cam piece 519 can be engaged only with the door operating rod 507. It is necessary to arrange the cam piece 519 so as not to interfere with each other by shifting the position in the front-rear direction. The direction of the unlocking operation in the main body cam piece 517 and the direction of the unlocking operation in the door cam piece 519 are opposite to each other, but the main body cam piece 517 is in contact with the main body frame sliding contact surface 542. The rotation direction of the lock rotation member 528 when slidably contacting the door and the rotation direction of the lock rotation member 528 when the door cam piece 519 is slidably contacted with the door slide contact surface 543, That is, the lock claw portion 527 must be in a direction to escape.

  Therefore, in the locking device 123 according to the present embodiment, the through hole portion 541 is formed in the lock rotation member 528, and the main body frame sliding contact surface 542 is formed on the inner peripheral edge of the through hole portion 541, thereby sliding the door. By forming the surface 543 on the outer peripheral edge of the lock rotating member 528, the main body cam piece 517 and the door cam piece 519 spaced apart in the front-rear direction are similarly brought into sliding contact with the lock rotating member 528. In addition, the lock rotation member 528 can be rotated in the same direction during the unlocking operation.

  The lock operation piece 530 includes a contact portion 531 that contacts the wall portion H of the outer frame 2 when the main body housing 3 is closed, and a rotation that pivotally supports the lock operation piece 530 with respect to the lock rotation member 528. The moving shaft portion 532 is provided, and is supported so as to be rotatable between an extended position where the distance between the lock claw portion 527 and the abutting portion 531 is maximum and a pushing position where the distance is minimum. According to this, when the main body housing 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the contact portion 531 of the lock operation piece 530 contacts the wall portion H of the outer frame 2 and presses the lock rotation member 528. That is, the lock rotation member 528 is rotated so that the lock claw portion 527 is inserted into the main body frame cutout 523 and the door cutout 524 (see FIG. 47B). On the other hand, since the lock operation piece 530 is pivotally supported with respect to the lock rotation member 528, the cylinder lock 515 is operated in a state where the main body housing 3 is closed, and the main body cam piece 517 or the door cam piece. When 519 slides on the lock rotation member 528, the lock rotation member 528 rotates while the contact portion 531 of the lock operation piece 530 is in contact with the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 48B). That is, the lock operation piece 530 rotates relative to the lock rotation member 528, and the push in which the distance becomes the minimum from the extended position where the distance between the lock claw portion 527 and the contact portion 531 becomes the maximum. Displace to position. As described above, since the lock rotation member 528 can be rotated while the contact portion 531 of the lock operation piece 530 is in contact with the outer frame 2, the unlocking operation is smoothly performed. Can be made. In particular, as shown in FIG. 43, the lock mechanism 526 includes a fourth elastic member 533 (also used as the third elastic member 529 in this embodiment), and urges the lock operation piece 530 toward the extended position. For this reason, the lock operation piece 530 can be automatically returned to the extended position by opening the main body housing 3, and when the main body housing 3 is closed thereafter, the lock rotating member 528 is pressed. The lock claw portion 527 can be inserted into the main body frame cutout 523 and the door cutout 524. The elastic force that urges the lock operation piece 530 toward the extended position is larger than the elastic force that urges the lock rotation member 528 toward the lock release side, so that the lock operation piece 530 contacts the outer frame 2. In this case, it is possible to prevent only the lock operation piece 530 from being displaced from the extended position to the pushed-in position, and to reliably rotate the lock rotation member 528 (that is, to insert the lock claw portion 527). It becomes possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, since the abutting portion 531 includes a roller 534 that is rotatably supported, the lock rotating piece 530 is in contact with the outer frame 2 while the abutting portion 531 of the lock operating piece 530 is abutted. When the moving member 528 is rotated, the abutting portion 531 can be smoothly slid along the outer frame 2. As a result, a force for rotating the lock rotating member 528 in the unlocking direction, that is, It becomes possible to reduce the rotational operation force of the key in the cylinder lock 515.

  49, when the door operating rod 507 is slid from the locked position to the unlocked position on the upper side of the door operating rod 507 (from the state of FIG. 49 (a) to FIG. 49 (b)). The holding member 545 that engages with the door operating rod 507 and holds the door operating rod 507 in the unlocked position, and the holding member 545 is attached in a direction to engage the door operating rod 507. A fifth elastic member 546 (see FIG. 41) is provided. According to this, when the door operating rod 507 is once slid to the unlocked position by operating the key in the cylinder lock 515 and the door-shaped front member 4 is opened, the claw portion 545a of the holding member 545 is moved to the door operating rod 507. The door operating rod 507 can be held in the unlocked position even if it is engaged with the engaging recess 507b and then the key is released or the key is removed from the key hole. Further, when the door operating rod 507 is held by the holding member 545, a part of the holding member 545 is arranged to protrude from the front surface of the mounting base 500 toward the door-shaped front member 4, and then the door-shaped front member 4 is moved. When in the closed position, the front end of the holding member 545 is pressed by the door-shaped front member 4 and the holding state of the door operating rod 507 is released (see FIG. 49A). For this reason, when the door-shaped front member 4 is closed, the door-shaped front member 4 is locked to the main body housing 3 without performing the unlocking operation and the locking operation of the door operating rod 507 with a key. Is possible. Further, when the door-shaped front member 4 is closed, the door locking hook 506 can be prevented from colliding with the locking tool 505 of the door-shaped front member 4, and damage to the door locking hook 506 and the surroundings of the locking tool 505 can be prevented. Can be prevented. When the door operating rod 507 is in the unlocked position, the lock mechanism 526 is unlocked, so that the main body frame operating rod 503 can be slid without being operated by a key on the cylinder lock 515. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 36 and 41, the mounting base 500 is made of sheet metal, and the first mounting portion 551 fixed to the rear surface of the side frame portion 550 on the free end side of the main body housing 3, and the first mounting A second mounting portion 552 bent substantially vertically from the left edge of the portion 551 toward the rear, and a third mounting portion 553 bent back from the rear edge of the second mounting portion 552. ing. That is, the cross section is formed so as to be substantially L-shaped, and the portion that is perpendicular to the side frame portion 550 is formed so as to have a predetermined gap therebetween. The body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 are accommodated in the gap, and the cylinder lock 515 is attached to the first mounting portion 551. The mounting base 500 has a plurality of openings through which the main body cam piece 517 and the door cam piece 519 of the cylinder lock 515, a part of the lock mechanism 526, and the main body frame locking hook 502 can be inserted. The main body frame operating rod 503 and the door operating rod 507 accommodated in the mounting base 500 can be operated from the outside of the mounting base 500. In this manner, the main body frame operating rod 503, the door operating rod 507, and other mechanism portions are housed in the folded sheet metal frame, thereby suppressing external operations and preventing unauthorized operation. It becomes possible to prevent more effectively.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, a security cover 557 that covers the periphery of the lock mechanism 526 is provided on the outer side of the second mounting portion 552, so that unauthorized operation of the lock mechanism 526 from the outside is prevented. Blocks and further improves crime prevention.

  Since the first mounting portion 551 of the mounting base 500 is fixed to the rear surface of the side frame portion 550 of the main body housing 3, the door locking hook 506 is disposed through the side frame portion 550. That is, the side frame 550 has an opening 555 at a portion facing the door locking hook 506 and the holding member 545. However, the opening 555 that faces the door locking hook 506 is larger than the door locking hook 506, and the protruding hook 556 formed as the locking member 505 in the door-shaped front member 4 can be inserted. It has become. That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the protruding hooking portion 556 is formed to protrude rearward from the reinforcing metal frame 101 provided at the peripheral edge of the back surface of the door-shaped front member 4, and the door-shaped front member 4 is in the closed position. Then, the door locking hook 506 can be locked by being inserted into the opening 555 of the side frame portion 550. In this way, the door locking hook 506 does not protrude from the side frame portion 550 of the main body housing 3, but the locking member 505 of the door-shaped front member 4 is placed in the opening 555 so that the door locking hook 506 is picked up. Since it is inserted, it is more difficult to operate the door locking hook 506 by performing an illegal operation from the outside, such as a piano wire, and the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Heretofore, the physical structure of the ball throwing drum machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described. According to the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 having such a structure, the storage tray body 20 is formed of a member different from the operation panel 6 and is formed to project from the position below the operation panel 6 to the player side. It is possible to operate the input operation unit and the game operation unit in a relaxed state. Moreover, since the storage tray body 20 has a one-plate structure, the arrangement positions of the storage tray body 20 and the operation panel 6 are lowered as a whole, and the effect display device 15 can be arranged at an appropriate position with good visibility. It becomes possible.

  Further, the operation panel 6 is disposed on the storage tray body 20 and the operation panel 6 protrudes toward the player side, but a gap 21 is provided between the operation panel 6 and the storage tray body 20. From this, it is possible to visually recognize the game balls stored in the storage tray body 20 or the game balls guided by the storage tray body 20, and easily grasp the presence or absence of storage or the amount of game balls stored. Can be made. In particular, since the size of the gap 21 is approximately 1.5 cm or more, it becomes possible to insert a finger through the gap 21 between the operation panel 6 and the storage tray 20, and it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball through the gap 21. Even so, it is possible to confirm the presence of the game ball by inserting a finger. Moreover, even when a ball clogging occurs in the storage dish 20, it is possible to easily cope with it. Moreover, since the size of the gap 21 is approximately 4 cm or less, the player's fist can be prevented from entering between the operation panel 6 and the storage tray body 20, and as a result, the game ball communicating with the storage tray body 20. Unauthorized acts against the capture device 19 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the operation panel 6 protrudes to the player side from the storage tray body 20 or has an equivalent protrusion amount, even when the game operation unit or the like is arranged on the front surface of the operation panel 6. The game operation unit and the like can be operated without touching the storage dish 20. That is, even when the operation panel 6 and the storage dish body 20 are arranged close to each other, it is possible to suppress a decrease in operability.

  Further, by configuring the storage dish 20 into the storage unit 25 and the passage unit 26, a relatively large number of game balls are stored in the storage unit 25, and the storage unit 25 faces the game ball take-in device 19. This makes it possible to smoothly flow down the game balls. Further, since the upper surface of the downstream side of the passage portion 26 is closed by the closing member 28, it is possible to more reliably prevent an illegal act with respect to the game ball take-in device 19. In addition, since the ball | bowl visual recognition window 29 is formed in the storage tray body 20, it becomes possible to make the game ball which rolls the channel | path part 26 visually easy. In particular, since the ball viewing window 29 is formed in the front surface portion of the storage dish body 20, it is possible to visually recognize the game in a natural manner without taking a posture of looking through the gap.

  In addition, since the operation panel 6 is not disposed above the storage unit 25, the storage state in the storage unit 25 can be easily viewed from above or obliquely from above. In other words, even if it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball rolling in the passage portion 26, at least only the storage state of the game ball is clearly recognized, so that the payout of the game ball (prize ball) is visually recognized. The original fun of gaming machines can be maintained. Since the game state lamp 31 is disposed in the open space 30 above the storage unit 25, the storage state of the game ball can be visually recognized while checking the game state based on the light emission state of the game state lamp 31. Therefore, it becomes possible to pay more attention to the game state lamp 31 and recognize the change in the game state in association with the payout state of the game ball.

  Further, since the upper surface of the operation panel 6 is a flat surface, it is possible to place the hand in a stable state. In addition, since the input operation unit and the game operation unit are arranged separately on the upper surface and the front surface of the operation panel 6, the input operation unit and the game operation unit can be arranged without being separated in the left-right direction. All the operation units can be operated in sequence without moving the hand placed on the operation panel 6.

  Further, by arranging the lending and adjusting operation part 36 that is rarely operated during the game, below the storage dish body 20, that is, in the vicinity of the lower end of the door-shaped front member 4, it can be provided without interfering with the game. Moreover, since the flat protrusion part 35 is projected and formed in the player side, even if it arrange | positions in the vicinity of the storage tray body 20, it becomes possible to operate easily. In particular, since the loan settlement operation unit 36 is disposed on the inclined surface 37 that is inclined downward toward the player side, the loan settlement operation unit 36 is inclined upward and can be easily operated.

  In addition, since an illumination unit 38 is provided around the lending and adjusting operation unit 36 and emits light based on the gaming state, the location of the renting and adjusting operation unit 36 can be made conspicuous during the game, and at the time of adjusting, etc. The trouble of confirming the location of the loan settlement operation unit 36 can be reduced, and the usability can be improved.

  In addition, since the in-machine tank 39 is interposed between the game ball dispensing device 18 and the storage tray body 20, the shortage of capacity due to the storage tray body 20 having a one-plate structure can be compensated, and the storage tray body It is possible to prevent frequent withdrawal of game balls from 20 or intermittent insertion of game balls.

  Furthermore, the effect display device 15 capable of diversifying the effect mode more than the symbol variation display device 13 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the door-shaped front member 4, that is, at an appropriate position having good visibility for the player. By doing so, the door-shaped front member 4 can be further paid attention, and the change of the production mode can be enjoyed in an easy posture. In particular, the display device window portion 16 for visually recognizing the effect display device 15 is larger than the drum window portion 14 for visually recognizing the symbol variation display device 13, so that the effect on the effect display device 15 is derived on a large screen. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful and realistic presentation.

  In the present embodiment, the effect display device 15 is disposed in the center portion of the door-shaped front member 4 and the small symbol variation display device 13 is disposed on the upper side of the door-shaped front member 4. On the contrary, a relatively large symbol variation display device may be disposed at the center of the door-shaped front member 4 and an effect display device may be disposed above the door-shaped front member 4. When comprised in this way, it becomes possible to arrange | position a symbol fluctuation display apparatus in the appropriate position with sufficient visibility. In particular, in the symbol variation display device, since a so-called “eye push” operation is performed to stop the symbol reel at an appropriate position, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation by improving visibility.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the design in which the symbol variation display device 13 is mounted on the door-shaped front member 4 is shown, but the symbol variation display device 13 is accommodated in the main body housing 3 and formed on the door-shaped front member 4. You may make it visually recognize through the opened window part.

[Internal configuration of ball throwing cylinder]
FIG. 50 schematically shows configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like that are provided in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1. The ball throwing and spinning machine 1 has a main control board 400 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. The main control board 400 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input / output interface (an input control circuit and an input control circuit). Output control circuit) and the like are mounted.

  First, the main control board 400 is connected to the game ball capturing device 19 and the symbol variation display device 13, and controls the operation of the game ball capturing device 19 and the symbol variation display device 13. The bet buttons 7 and 8, the start lever 9, the reel stop button 10 and the like are all connected to the main control board 400, and these operation buttons detect an operation by the player using a sensor (not shown). The detected operation signal can be output to the main control board 400.

  Specifically, the main control board 400 transmits a control signal to the game ball capturing device 19 to cause the game ball capturing device 19 to capture the game ball thrown by the player. Thereafter, when the start lever 9 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 13 (starting the rotation of each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main control board 400, and the reel stop button When 10a, 10b, and 10c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is output to the main control board 400.

  Here, the game ball take-in device 19 includes the above-described drive motor, proximity switches 59 and 60, count switches 57 and 58, a ball removal valve detector 56, a photo switch for angle detection, and the like. Various processes related to the taking-in of game balls, which will be described later, are executed by the control (see FIGS. 70 to 74), and details will be described later.

  Hereinafter, the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c are referred to as a left reel stop button 10a, a middle reel stop button 10b, and a right reel stop button 10c.

  The symbol variation display device 13 includes a reel motor 321 for rotating the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (left reel motor 321a, middle reel motor 321b, and right reel motor 321c). The reel motor 321 includes a stepping motor, and each of the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be rotated and stopped independently, and a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 14 during the rotation. Displayed while changing.

  In addition, a photo sensor (position sensor) 325 for detecting a reference position related to the rotation of each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c is provided. That is, each of the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c is provided with position sensors 325a, 325b, 325c corresponding to the inside of the reels (left reel position sensor 325a, middle reel position sensor 325b, right reel position sensor 325c). . When detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors are input to the main control board 400, the main control board 400 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main control board 400 to the symbol variation display device 13 and the game ball payout device 18. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel motors 321a, 321b, and 321c described above is output from the main control board 400. The game ball payout device 18 receives a drive signal from the main control board 400 to the payout control board 402 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and the game ball payout device 18 receives the award. The ball is dispensed. In addition to the above, a game ball may be paid out. This is a case where a game cancel operation is performed by operating the ball removal knob 11 in a state where there is a game ball that has been taken in. Also in this case, the main control board 400 transmits a drive signal to the payout control board 402 and returns the game ball to the player.

  Further, the payout control board 402 generates a ball lending instruction from a known CR sand when a player operates a ball lending button on the CR frequency display board, and a lending ball is played based on this instruction. 18 pays out to the player.

  Incidentally, the ball throwing spinning machine 1 includes a sub board 360 in addition to the main control board 400. The sub board 360 has a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input / output interface (input control circuit and output control circuit), In addition to a VDP (Video Display Processor) and the like, an AMP (Audio Amplifier), a sound source IC, and the like are also mounted. Then, the sub board 360 receives a one-way command from the main control board 400 to produce an effect on the effect display device 15 using the built-in VDP and generate sound effects from the left and right speakers 130. The sub board 360 transmits a command to the lamp driving board 363 as a serial signal, and the lamp driving board 363 controls the illumination of various lamps.

  The main control board 400 may be provided with an external relay terminal board for connecting the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 to the hall computer of the game hall. At this time, the external relay terminal board plays a role of relaying various signals (ball insertion signal, prize ball payout signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 400 to the hall computer.

  The example of the internal configuration of the ball throwing cylinder machine 1 has been described above. In the game by the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 having such a configuration, when the player operates the start lever 9 with the bet number determined, each of the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c rotates, and then the player stops the reels. When the buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c are operated, the corresponding symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, a combination of symbols on an effective line to be described later. The game result is judged from the mode, and a prescribed number of prize balls corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are awarded as necessary. In the present embodiment, the number of bets is determined by the player. However, in recent years, it is often the case that the MAX bet is set as a game start condition (that is, unless 15 game balls are taken in). The game does not start).

  Hereinafter, the structure and control for realizing the game playability performed by the above-described ball throwing and revolving machine 1 in a more characteristic manner will be described in more detail.

[Design of each reel, design row]
As shown in FIG. 51, each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a symbol row (a symbol sequence formed by arranging a plurality of symbols (any one of a total of nine symbols in this figure) at regular intervals). Reel bands (symbol bands) 381a, 381b, 381c on which a total of 14 symbols shown in array numbers 1 to 14 are indicated are attached. FIG. 51 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the reel bands 381a, 381b, 381c attached to the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience.

  In each of the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, three) are provided for the drum window 14 (also referred to as a symbol display window). In the following description, they are arranged so as to be visible via a symbol display window 14 (see FIG. 52 described next).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 51, the types of symbols include “red 7” symbols (hereinafter referred to as “red 7 symbols”, which correspond to three of the arrangement numbers 11 of the reel bands 381a, 381b, 381c), and , “White 7” symbols (hereinafter referred to as White 7 symbols, which corresponds to the arrangement number 2 of the reel band 381c), which are larger than the other symbols. In addition, the “red 7” symbol is filled with red inside, and “white 7” is filled with white inside. In this way, the red 7 symbol and the white 7 symbol are larger and relatively conspicuous compared to the other symbols, so that it is easier to visually recognize than the other symbols.

  Also, “a symbol shaped“ S ””, hereinafter referred to as “S” symbol ”(for example, the arrangement number 1 of the reel band 381a),“ a symbol shaped “M child”, M "Child design" (for example, the arrangement number 3 of the reel band 381a, etc.), "The design of the character" E man ", hereinafter the E man design" (for example, the arrangement number 4 of the reel band 381a, etc.) “The design of the character“ H ””, hereinafter referred to as the “H” design ”(for example, the arrangement number 5 of the reel band 381a),“ The design of the character “I” ”, and below, the I "Design" (for example, the arrangement number 1 of the reel band 381b), "design that shaped the character" M man ", hereinafter referred to as the M man design" (for example, the arrangement number 2 of the reel band 381b), "Character" T child "shape Tsu was the symbol, "that T child pattern in the following (for example, of the reel band 381b SEQ ID NO: No. 3, etc.), there is.

  As described above, there are a total of nine types of symbols written on the reel bands 381a, 381b, 381c. Five types of reel band 381a (S male, M child, E male, H male, red 7) and four types of reel band 381b (I male, M male, T child, red 7), reel band 381c There are 6 types of symbols (S male, white 7, E male, M child, H male, red 7).

[Effective line]
FIG. 52 shows an enlarged view of the symbol display window 14. From the symbol display window 14, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where the symbols are displayed are referred to as “upper (or upper)”, “middle (or middle)” and “lower (or lower)” from the top.

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 14. In the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 14 from “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Further, as described above, the game state lamp 31 on the front surface of the door-shaped front member 4 is provided with various lamps for notifying the state relating to various games, and as shown in FIG. Among the gaming state lamps 31, the uppermost three LEDs (reference numerals 602 a, 602 b, and 602 c shown in the figure) display the number of game balls inserted for displaying the number of game balls inserted (that is, the number of bets). Lamp 602. Each of the game ball insertion number display lamps 602 corresponds to the number of bets (that is, a multiplier according to the number of game balls inserted). Specifically, the game ball insertion number display lamp 602a has one bet ( The number of game balls inserted is 5), the number of game balls inserted display lamp 602b is 2 bets (the number of game balls inserted is 10), the number of game balls inserted display lamp 602c is 3 bets (the number of game balls inserted is 15), Each corresponds.

  An arrangement (straight line type) that is valid according to the number of bets is determined in advance. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. The following is unified with the active line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 14, if the respective symbols are not arranged on one active line, the predetermined winning combination It is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to is displayed. In such a case, it is determined that a disparate combination pattern is displayed.

  Next, general items regarding the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets and the number of active lines will be described. The effective line corresponding to one bet is only one effective line 621 (middle stage line 621) arranged in a "middle stage-middle stage-middle stage" connecting the middle positions of the reels. This is called “1 BET line”.

  In the case of 2-bet, in addition to the above-described 1 BET line, an effective line 622a (upper line 622a) arranged in an "upper stage-upper stage-upper stage" connecting the upper stage positions of the reels and a lower stage position of each reel are connected. Two effective lines, the effective line 622b (lower line 622b) arranged in the order of “lower stage-lower stage-lower stage”, are newly added. The two effective lines of the upper line and the lower line are collectively referred to as “2 BET line”. Therefore, in the case of 2 bets, there are a total of 3 active lines.

  In the case of 3 bets, in addition to the 1BET line and 2BET line described above, the lower right row is connected to the upper position of the left reel, the middle position of the middle reel, and the lower position of the right reel. The line 623b (downwardly right line 623b) and the effective line 623a (right side) of “lower stage—middle stage—upper stage” connecting the lower stage position of the left reel, the middle stage position of the middle reel, and the upper stage position of the right reel are “lower stage—middle stage—upper stage” Two effective lines of the rising line 623a) are newly added. The two effective lines of the right-up line and the right-down line are collectively referred to as “3BET line”. Therefore, in the case of 3 bets, there are a total of 5 active lines.

  The above is a description of an effective line of a general spinning-type game machine, but the effective line is not limited to the linear type as described above. Furthermore, it is not restricted to the aspect which increases the corresponding effective line whenever the number of bets increases as mentioned above. Hereinafter, the effective line of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view for explaining an effective line of the ball throwing and spinning machine of the present embodiment.

  In the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of this embodiment, the multiplier is only 3 bets (MAX bets). Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the effective line 623b (right downward line 623b) arranged in the right-down direction, which becomes “upper-middle-lower” in the symbol display window 14, and shown in FIG. 53 (b). In this way, the effective line 623a (upward right line 623a) in the symbol display window 14 that is in the “lower stage-middle stage-upper stage” is included in the effective line. Therefore, in the ball throwing spinning machine 1, lines other than the above (the middle line 621, the upper line 622a, and the lower line 622b) are not included in the effective lines.

  Furthermore, the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 of the present embodiment also has an irregular effective line different from the linear effective line. As shown in FIG. 53 (c), the irregular-type effective lines are V-shaped effective lines 624a (V-shaped lines 624a) that become “upper-middle-upper” in the symbol display window 14. And, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), it is an effective line 624b (inverted V-shaped line 624b) arranged in an inverted V shape that becomes “lower stage-middle stage-lower stage” in the symbol display window 14.

  As described above, in the ball throwing spinning machine 1 according to the present embodiment, two patterns of linear effective lines (lower right line 623b and right upward line 623a) and two patterns of irregular effective lines (V-shaped lines). 624a and inverted V-shaped line 624b), a total of four patterns of effective lines.

  Thereby, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is a so-called “break” (an eye composed of symbols with different symbol combinations), the player can grasp the winning combination. Although it is difficult to determine whether or not the combination corresponding to the winning combination is a so-called scatter, it is difficult to determine whether or not the winning combination has been displayed in one of the upper, middle and lower rows Since only four are valid and there are four valid combinations, it is possible to grasp if the player has an intention to grasp the winning combination. In addition, a part of each of the symbol reels 301a to 301c is invalidated although one symbol is displayed on each of the upper, middle and lower levels in the symbol display window 14, so that each symbol reel The rotation stop control of 301a to 301c is not complicated, and the control load is not increased easily.

  The effective line is not limited to the above line. For example, for any one of the three rows of symbol reels 301a to 301c in which the active line is arranged in the left-right direction, the symbol represented in any one of the upper, middle, and lower tiers must be displayed. For the other two columns, the symbols shown in any one of the two stages selected from the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage may be passed. According to this, there are four effective lines, and the “lower-upper-lower” angle is a V-shaped line with a relatively small angle (not shown) and “upper-lower-upper”. An inverted V-shaped line (not shown) having a relatively small angle can also be an effective line.

  In addition, when a position expressed at a position where an effective line passes is referred to as an effective position, any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages is an effective position for the one column (that is, the one column) There is only one effective position on the upper side), and for the other two columns other than the one column, two of the upper, middle and lower levels are effective positions. As a result, even if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is derived, since there is only one valid position for the one row, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are always valid. It will be expressed in the position.

  Even in such a case, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is a so-called disparity, it is possible to grasp if the player has an intention to grasp the winning combination. In addition, all of the symbol reels 301a to 301c are invalidated even though symbols are displayed one by one in all the upper, middle, and lower levels in the symbol display window 14, so that the symbol reel 301a The stop control of the rotation of ˜301c is not complicated, and the control load is not increased easily.

[Game state display section]
next. The above-described gaming state lamp 31 is provided with indicators such as lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or flashed) in accordance with the gaming state of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1. And the area | region where these indicators are arrange | positioned comprises the game state display part for a player to grasp | ascertain the various states regarding the ball throwing-around machine 1. FIG. Note that the lighting (or blinking) control of various indicators in the gaming status lamp 31 (gaming status display unit) is performed by a gaming status display board (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 54, the game status lamp 31 includes an error display lamp 604, a stop display lamp 605, a service game display lamp 606, a game start display lamp 608, in addition to the above-described game ball insertion number display lamp 602. A game ball insertion display lamp 610 and a game ball payout display lamp 612 are provided. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in the bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. May be.

  The error display lamp 604 starts to light (or flashes) when any trouble or failure occurs during the game of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, and indicates that a trouble or the like is currently occurring. It also has a role to inform the staff in charge).

  The stop display lamp 605 indicates that the stop state is generated when a stop switch (not shown) is set to ON, and the stop state is not accepted after the bonus game is over and the game ball is not accepted. It has a role of informing players (including hall attendants).

  The service game display lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a service game (a game can be played again without newly playing a game ball) when the game result becomes a service role (described later). . Note that the service game of this embodiment is a game in which the next game can be executed without the game ball being taken in from the game ball take-in device 19 (without being automatically bet). However, this service game may be a conventional RT in which the game is executed by betting automatically.

  The game start display lamp 608 starts to light (or flash) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet and the symbol variation display device 13 becomes operable, and the player operates the start lever 9 (start operation). ).

  The game ball insertion display lamp 610 has a role of prompting the player to place a bet (that is, to insert a game ball) by continuing to be lit (or blinking) when the game ball can be inserted.

  The game ball payout display lamp 612 is turned on (or flashes) during the payout of the prize ball when the prize ball is paid out in accordance with the game result, so that the prize ball is paid out to the player. Has a role to inform.

[Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, the winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the ball throwing spinning machine 1 and the combination of the corresponding symbols will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 shows combinations of symbols corresponding to each winning combination of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 and their benefits (the number of paid-out balls, etc., hereinafter referred to as a game privilege). Note that FIG. 55 may be displayed on a display panel or the like as a payout table for the player (a simple description of the gaming benefits of each winning combination).

  As described above, the reels 381a, 381b, and 381c are attached to the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively. The order of symbols, the types of symbols, etc. are different for each reel band. For example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is displayed in the symbol display window 14 in an overlapping manner. There is nothing. In addition, as long as the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is not displayed in the symbol display window 14, the order of symbols and the types of symbols of several reel bands may be the same.

  Whether the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed from the display content (the symbol combination mode) displayed in the symbol display window 14 when all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination mode corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the above-mentioned active lines in the symbol display window 14. That is, in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, there are four (four lines) effective lines (the combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations are not displayed in the symbol display window 14).

  In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to a (predetermined) winning combination (referred to as a winning combination symbol) means that a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines. It is said that the winning symbols are aligned.

  The design of the ball throwing round machine 1 includes “red 7 symbol”, “white 7 symbol”, “S man symbol”, “M child symbol”, “E man symbol”, “H man symbol”, “I man” As described above, there are “design”, “M male design”, and “T child design”. Among them, “red 7 design” and “white 7 design” are more conspicuous than other designs. The design is easy to identify. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. Among these, there is only one “red 7 symbol” on each of the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c, and in addition, the color is easier to visually recognize than red and other symbols. The “white 7 symbols” are only in the right reel 301c, and the number is one. In addition, since the color is also white, it is easier to visually recognize than other designs. These symbols are easy for a player to make a target symbol because of the color and the size of the symbol even while the reel is rotating.

  These symbols are only symbolic symbols by themselves (one symbol alone does not correspond to a winning role. However, as will be described later, if the winning role is a cherry, only one symbol will win the winning role. Corresponding), it becomes a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. In the following, a combination pattern of predetermined symbols corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 55 will be described.

[Big Bonus, Regular Bonus]
As shown in FIG. 55, the winning combination indicated as BB is a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as BB). In this BB, “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol” is determined in advance as a combination mode of the corresponding symbol (BB symbol). In other words, when the combination of symbols consisting of all “red 7 symbols” is aligned on one effective line, the BB symbols are aligned.

  When the BB symbols are aligned, a gaming bonus called a big bonus game (hereinafter referred to as BB game) is given. In this BB game, a plurality of games that make it easy to obtain a prize ball are concentrated and executed continuously until a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 1400) are paid out. When the paid-out prize balls reach the specified number (or may exceed the specified number), the BB game ends.

  Further, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, no prize ball is awarded when the BB symbols are aligned (the game with the BB symbols aligned). That is, having the BB symbols together serves as an opportunity to move to the BB game. In addition, since only one BB symbol is arranged on each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c (see FIG. 51), the BB symbol is accurately aimed in the symbol display window 14 (which can be controlled to be pulled in later). Unless the stop operation (operation to press the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c) is performed, the BB symbols cannot be aligned. In this way, the stop operation aiming at the target symbol (in this example, BB symbol), that is, “to push”, needs to be performed by the skill (or technology or player's intention) in the revolving type gaming machine. Operation).

  Therefore, if the player's skill to “push” is high (mainly a player who is highly skilled in the game, such as a player who is highly skilled in the game), the position aimed at the target symbol (for example, in the symbol display window 14) ) Can be displayed (stopped) easily. On the other hand, if the player's skill to “push” is low (mainly an inexperienced player, such as a player with a low level of game skill), the position aimed at the target symbol (for example, in the symbol display window 14) ) Is not easy to display (stop) (can be said to be difficult).

  Further, when the BB game is ended, a gaming privilege called a third service game described later (a game played based on a hit value determination table (ST3) shown in FIG. 58D described later) is given (details will be described later). To do). In the third service game, a state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, it becomes easier to win a predetermined winning combination for a certain period). In other words, when the BB symbols are available, in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball in the BB game, an additional privilege (for example, more prize balls can be obtained, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is given. It will be.

  The winning combination indicated as RB is a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). The combination mode of the symbols when the RB symbols are aligned is “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-white 7 symbol”.

  When the RB symbols are arranged, a gaming bonus called a regular bonus game (hereinafter referred to as RB game) is given. This RB game is concentrated until a plurality of games where it is easy to obtain a prize ball is concentrated, and continues until a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 525) are paid out compared to the case where the BB game is executed. Executed. When the paid-out prize balls reach the specified number (or may exceed the specified number), the RB game ends. The RB game may be ended when the specified number of games is continued and the specified number of games is reached, or whether the specified number of games or the specified number of games is reached, The RB game may be terminated when any one of the conditions is satisfied. Whether the RB game has reached a specified number of games (for example, 12 times) or whether the specified number of winnings has been reached during the RB game period (for example, winning a winning combination 7 times) The RB game may be ended when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

  Even when RB symbols are arranged, no prize ball is given in the game, and only a role as an opportunity to shift to the RB game is provided. In addition, each of the symbols constituting the RB symbol (7 red symbols and 7 white symbols) is arranged only one on each of the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c as in the case of the BB symbol (see FIG. 51). ).

  Further, when the RB game is finished, a gaming privilege called a fourth service game described later (a game played based on a hit value determination table (normal) shown in FIG. 59A described later) is given (details will be described later). To do). This fourth service game is also given after the end of the BB game in that a state advantageous to the player (for example, it becomes easier to win a predetermined winning combination for a certain period of time) continues for a predetermined number of times. It is the same as the 3-service game. In other words, when the RB symbols are arranged, an additional privilege (for example, more prize balls can be obtained, etc.) is given that the player wins a small amount of prize balls in the RB game and becomes advantageous to the player. It will be.

  As described above, the ball throwing / retracting machine 1 has an opportunity for the player to concentrate and acquire the winning balls through the two bonus games, the BB game and the RB game. However, it is only the BB game that the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls. Further, in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, the maximum number (for example, 75) of prize balls to be paid out in one game is determined in advance, and the number of prize balls to be paid out as a result of one game is the maximum. It does not exceed the number. Therefore, although the number of prize balls that can be acquired between the start and end of the RB game is larger than the maximum number (75) that can be acquired in one game, the BB game starts. The number of prize balls that can be earned during the period from the end to the end is considerably smaller (about 1/3).

[Service role (service role 1, service role 2)]
As shown in FIG. 55, for the winning combination shown as service combination 1 (service 1), “H male design-I male design-H male design” is selected as the combination mode of the corresponding design (service combination 1 design). Is predetermined.

  When the service combination 1 pattern is prepared, a game privilege called a service game is given. In this service game, the next game can be executed without inserting a game ball or performing a betting operation. In that case, it is preferable that the number of effective lines is always the maximum number of effective lines from the viewpoint of serving a game to a player. However, it may be the same as the number of effective lines of the game with the symbols of the service combination 1 as in the conventional replay. Also, any other effective number of lines may be used.

  In addition, “H male symbol-T child symbol-H male symbol” is determined in advance as a combination pattern of the corresponding symbol (service symbol 2 symbol) for the winning symbol indicated as service symbol 2 (service 2). Yes.

  When the service combination 2 symbols are prepared, a game privilege called a service game is given in the same manner as when the service combination 1 symbols are prepared. Even in this service game, the next game can be executed without inserting a game ball or performing a betting operation. In this case, the number of effective lines is preferably always the maximum number of effective lines. However, it may be the same as the number of active lines of the game with the service combination 2 symbols. Also, any other effective number of lines may be used.

  Here, when the service combination 1 symbol is prepared, even if the service game is performed, the subsequent game state is not changed, and all the processes from the lottery process to the provision of the privilege are completed in one game. On the other hand, after the service game 2 symbols are arranged and the service game is performed, the first service game (when the service combination 2 symbols as the winning combination are arranged (when the service combination 2 is won) is determined depending on the gaming state. There is a case where the game is shifted to a game executed based on the hit value determination table (ST1) shown in FIG. 58B described later (details will be described later). In this way, the two types of service combination (service combination 1 and service combination 2) are the same in that the next game can be executed as a service game, but whether or not to move to the first service game thereafter. The significance of existence is different.

  In the present specification, “winning” means that the lottery is won, and the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line on the condition that the lottery is won. However, if the above-described “promotion” fails, even if the lottery is won, the winning symbol may not be aligned on the active line.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, two types of service combination (service combination 1 and service combination 2) are provided as the “service combination” as the winning type. Let us refer to both service combination 1 and service combination 2.

  In this way, even when service role symbols are prepared, no prize ball is given, and a role as an opportunity to shift to a service game is provided. A characteristic of the game privilege of this service game is that it is not necessary to consume a new game ball (bet operation) in the next game instead of not paying out a prize ball. In addition, since the service role is a winning role that does not involve paying out a prize ball, it can be said that there is very little disadvantage to the hall even if the winning frequency is increased by increasing the winning probability, for example. Therefore, in the ball throwing spinning machine 1, the probability of winning about 1 in 7 times is set as the probability (details will be described later). As a result, the amount of game balls consumed by the player (the number of game balls consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. That is, by providing a winning combination as a service combination, it is possible to have a role of suppressing excessive consumption of game balls in the progress of the game.

  In addition, the service role symbols are arranged evenly on each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, other symbols placed between the service role symbol and the service role symbol (a symbol of a different type from the service role symbol). ) From 1 to a maximum of 4), it is possible to arrange the service role symbols without the need for a selection. The relationship between the arrangement of symbols and the necessity of pressing will be described in the reel stop process described later.

[Bell (Bell 1, Bell 2)]
As shown in FIG. 55, “M child symbol-T child symbol-M child symbol” is determined in advance as a combination pattern of the corresponding symbol (bell 1 symbol) for the winning combination indicated as bell 1. .

  When all the bell symbols are aligned, a predetermined number (for example, 25) of prize balls are paid out. The payout of the prize ball at this time is performed when the game is finished. That is, a gaming privilege of paying out 25 prize balls is granted when the bell 1 symbols are aligned.

  In addition, “M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol” is determined in advance as a combination aspect of the corresponding symbol (bell 2 symbol) for the winning combination indicated as bell 2.

  When the bell 2 symbols are aligned, a specified number (for example, 25) of prize balls is paid out in the same manner as when the bell 1 symbols are aligned. The payout of the prize ball at this time is also performed in the game. In other words, when the Bell 2 symbols are aligned, a gaming privilege of paying out 25 prize balls is awarded.

  Here, when the bell 1 symbols are prepared, even if 25 prize balls are paid out, the game state after that is not changed, and all the processes from the lottery process to the granting of the bonus are completed in one game. To do. On the other hand, after the Bell 2 symbols have been collected and 25 prize balls have been paid out, depending on the gaming state when the Bell 2 symbols as the winning role are aligned (when Bell 2 is won), the second service There is a case where the game is shifted to a game (a game executed based on a hit value determination table (ST2) shown in FIG. 58C described later) (details will be described later). In this way, the two types of bells (Bell 1 and Bell 2) are the same in that a gaming privilege such as payout of 25 prize balls is given, but whether or not to move to the second service game thereafter. Therefore, the significance of existence is different.

  In the present embodiment, since “Bell” as the winning category is provided with two types (Bell 1 and Bell 2) as described above, hereinafter, when simply referred to as “Bell”, Bell 1 and Bell 2 shall be referred to.

  In this way, it can be said that Bell is a winning role that can be expected to increase the number of possessed balls when playing the game, and can be expected to reduce the consumption of game balls. However, if the frequency of winning the bell increases, the player can increase the number of balls by simply proceeding with the game (there may be an increase in the number of balls even if the player does not win BB or RB). A), the game performance of the ball throwing machine 1 is impaired. It is also feared that it will be easy for a player to win an excessive number of prize balls and that the profit balance with the hall will be lost. For these reasons, the winning role of Bell will only have a role that prevents the player from consuming a large amount of balls during the game, and the winning probability will be lower than that of the service role. ing. Therefore, the bell symbols can be arranged evenly on the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c and aligned without the need for pressing as with the service role symbols described above. The relationship between the arrangement of symbols and the necessity of pressing will be described in the reel stop process described later.

[watermelon]
As shown in FIG. 55, “E male symbol-I male symbol-E male symbol” is determined in advance as a combination mode of the corresponding symbol (watermelon symbol) for the winning combination indicated as watermelon.

  When the watermelon symbols are aligned, a larger number (for example, 45) of prize balls is paid out than when the bell symbols are aligned. The payout of the prize ball at this time is performed in the game. That is, when the watermelon symbols are aligned, a gaming privilege of paying out 45 prize balls is awarded. That is, when the watermelon symbols are prepared, even if 45 prize balls are paid out, the subsequent game state is not changed, and all the processes from the lottery process to the provision of the privilege are completed in one game.

  As for the watermelon, just like the bell, the role of suppressing the player's consumption of a lot of balls in the progress of the game is limited, and the winning probability is kept lower than the service role. ing. In addition, watermelon pays out more award balls than a bell and has a high overlapping ratio with a bonus as will be described later, so the winning probability is kept lower than that of a bell. Therefore, the watermelon symbol is also arranged evenly on each of the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c in the same manner as the service role symbol described above (in this case, one other symbol arranged between the watermelon symbol and the watermelon symbol is one piece). It is no problem even if it is possible to align the watermelon symbols without the need for a full load. The relationship between the arrangement of symbols and the necessity of pressing will be described in the reel stop process described later.

[Cherry]
As shown in FIG. 55, a corresponding symbol (cherry symbol) is predetermined for the winning combination indicated as cherry. As for the cherry symbol, only one cherry symbol is stopped on the effective line, such as “ANY-M male symbol-ANY” (in this example, only the middle symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the reel 301b). The cherry pattern is considered to be complete. Here, “ANY” indicates that any symbol may be used. When the cherry symbols are arranged, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls are paid out in the game.

  Therefore, it is not determined that the cherry symbols are arranged according to the combination of symbols in a state where all the reels are stopped, but only for at least one reel, the symbols displayed on the active line when the reels are stopped. It can be said that it is determined that they are aligned. However, prize balls are paid out after all reels are stopped. In the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “at least one reel” described above is the middle reel 301b.

Here, in this embodiment, as is clear from the above-described effective line (see FIG. 52), all of the four effective lines (623a, 623b, 624a, 624b) have the effective line determination position on the middle reel 301b as “ "Middle stage". Therefore, when the cherry symbols are aligned (that is, when the M man symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b), the cherry symbols are always aligned on the four effective lines. Therefore, the number of payouts at this time is
[15 (number of cherries paid out) x 4 (number of active lines) = 60]
It becomes. That is, when the cherry symbols are arranged, a gaming privilege of paying out 60 prize balls is given.

  As with the bells and watermelons described above, the cherry is given the role of preventing the player from consuming a lot of balls during the game, and the winning probability is higher than the service role. Keep it low. In addition, Cherry has the highest payout of prize balls compared to other small roles such as bells and watermelons, and has a very high overlapping rate with bonuses as will be described later. The winning probability is kept low.

  In the present embodiment, the cherry symbols, unlike the service role symbols described above, are biased to be arranged on the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (particularly the middle reel 301c). If it is, it is a pattern that cannot be reliably arranged. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 51, by arranging only one cherry symbol on the middle reel 301c and only one on the middle reel 301c, it is difficult to align the cherry symbols unless they are pressed. ing. In addition, in order to make the cherry symbol a symbol that needs to be pressed, in each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c, the number of other symbols arranged between the cherry symbol and the cherry symbol can be drawn. The number may exceed the range.

  For these reasons, the cherry is a winning combination that is determined to be complete if the cherry symbol is displayed on the active line in a state where the reel is stopped only for at least one reel, and the maximum number of payouts is given. It will be a winning role.

  In addition, since the above-mentioned bell, watermelon and cherry are all winning combinations corresponding to the gaming privilege of paying out a prize ball, these will be collectively referred to as “small roles” as necessary.

  In the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bell, watermelon, and cherry are described as small roles. However, in addition to these, small roles can be provided. For example, different types of bell symbols, watermelon symbols, and cherry symbols are provided, and the number of prize balls to be paid out (specified number) is differentiated from the above small roles, or each symbol reel It is also possible to reduce the number of symbols 301a, 301b, and 301c to give a difficulty level as a winning combination symbol that needs to be pressed.

[Bonus exclusive role]
Further, as shown in FIG. 55, there is a bonus exclusive combination as a winning combination effective only during the BB game (and RB game). “E male symbol-T child symbol-E male symbol” is determined in advance as a combination mode of symbols (bonus exclusive symbol) corresponding to the bonus exclusive symbol.

  When the bonus exclusive role symbols are arranged in the BB game (hereinafter also including the RB game), a predetermined number (for example, 75) of prize balls is paid out. The payout of the prize ball at this time is performed in the game. That is, when the bonus exclusive role symbols are arranged, a gaming privilege of paying out 75 prize balls is awarded. That is, it can be said that the bonus exclusive combination is a small combination limited during the BB game. In the BB game, by making it easy to arrange the bonus exclusive roles, it is possible to concentrate and execute a plurality of games in which winning balls can be easily acquired. Therefore, since each symbol (E male symbol-T child symbol-E male symbol) constituting the combination of the bonus dedicated symbol pattern is uniformly arranged on each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c as described above, the bonus dedicated symbol symbol is displayed. It can be arranged without the need for an eye.

  In the RB game, a winning combination different from the bonus exclusive combination may be provided. Furthermore, the bell or cherry may be used instead without providing a bonus game medium limited small role such as a bonus exclusive role.

[Loose]
If none of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 55 is applicable, the game is lost. In the game that is lost, no prize ball is given, and the game after the next time is not changed. It can be said that the loser is a winning combination that does not give the player any game privilege in the game and the next and subsequent games.

  The above is the combination of each winning combination in the ball throwing spinning machine 1 and the symbols corresponding to each winning combination. From these, it can be said that the winning throwing machine 1 can arrange all the winning symbols except the bonus symbol (BB symbol and RB symbol) and the cherry symbol without the need for a selection. That is, it is possible to reduce a situation where the player is constantly strained (concentrated) and tired by making a special effort in every game, and the game can be smoothly advanced.

  Note that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

[Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed by the main control board 400 (mainly the main control CPU).

  FIG. 56 shows one basic game processing procedure in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before the power was turned off. Execute.

  In the next step S2, the number of game balls thrown in by the player (that is, the game balls taken from the storage unit 25 by the game ball take-in device 19) or when there are already stored game balls The multiplier is determined by pressing the MAX bet button 7 (or 1 bet button 8), and the start lever 9 is awaiting operation. In other words, the BET process is executed until the multiplication of one game is determined and the start lever 9 can be operated.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 9 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process for determining whether any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery is performed. Run. This internal lottery process means that in the stage before all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the next step S4 are in a stopped state (the player is stopped by a stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of the lottery corresponds to any winning combination, the corresponding winning combination is allowed.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when the rotation of all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, 10c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, 10c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that it has been turned on is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation process is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c.

  In step S5, when the player presses down the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of reception, and the reel stop that stops the rotation of the corresponding symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. Execute the process.

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that the rotation of all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has been stopped, the display content displayed on the active line (the combination of symbols) and the above-mentioned A determination process for determining the winning combination is performed by collating the permissible internal lottery result determined in step S3.

  In step S7, a winning ball payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. When the winning combination is BB, RB, service combination, etc., the game state is changed, and various game privileges such as service games are given.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 according to the present embodiment. Here, step S2 (BET process), step S3 (internal lottery process), and step S4 (reel rotation process) are performed by the player as a series of operations. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[Startup process]
FIG. 57 specifically shows each process performed in the start process described above.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the insertion of a game ball or the operation of the MAX bet button 7 (or 1 bet button 8) is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a game ball is inserted, the determination in step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. This determination is satisfied only when there is an operation of a game ball corresponding to a MAX bet (that is, insertion of 15 or more game balls), an operation of a 1-bet button 8 that becomes a MAX bet, or a MAX bet button 7. It is supposed to be.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined and the effective line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 9 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 9 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 9 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 9 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 9 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 9 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 9 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform the betting operation or throwing in the game ball or does not reach the MAX bet in step S101. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the service game, no new betting operation or game ball insertion is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the main control board 400 (specifically, RAM) in the service game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 9 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 9 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, if the start lever 9 is operated, random numbers are extracted in response to the operation. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. As for the timing for extracting the random number at this time, an appropriate extraction timing should be set in the programming process, for example, immediately after the start lever 9 is operated or after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Can do.

  In step S107, as a flag process, it is determined (random number value collation) which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as an extracted random number value). In this determination, the extracted random number values are collated in the hit value determination table shown in FIGS. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the flag corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is set to ON (= 1). The flag corresponding to the winning combination that is ON (= 1) at this time is referred to as the winning combination winning flag.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A hit value determination table in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. In addition to the BB game flag, the game status flag includes an RB game flag, a first service game flag, a second service game flag, a third service game flag, a fourth service game flag, and a fifth service game. There is a medium flag. When any of these game state flags is in the OFF (= 0) state, the normal game in-progress flag is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and the loss flag is turned ON. Here, the winning flag or the lost flag (collectively referred to as the establishment flag) means that the winning symbol corresponding to the establishment flag can be aligned only when the corresponding establishment flag is ON. It will be. Therefore, when the lost flag corresponds to the established flag, none of the winning combination symbols can be arranged. It can also be said that the above step S106 and step S107 are random number lottery inside the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, and in the following, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery, etc. . Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 56 described above).

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, 10c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c has become effective.

  In the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c) by the player is accepted. Is.

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) in the game. This means that a predetermined winning combination is won. Here, the result of the game in which the corresponding winning combination is permitted is reflected in the subsequent processes (reel stop process, determination process, payout process, etc.) as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery as the “establishment flag” described above. Will be.

  In the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, a range of random number values (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined as, for example, an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 214 = 16384 random numbers). In the present embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is 0 to 16383 (214 = 16384 random number values), but 0 to 32767 (215 = 32768 random values) or 0 to 65535 ( 216 = 65536 random number values). If the extraction range of random numbers is expanded, the range of random number values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased, so that it is difficult to cause an event that specific random number values are extracted in a biased manner.

Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, if the random value corresponding to BB is “1” among the random values in the extraction range (0 to 16383), the result of the internal lottery is “BB” when the extracted random value is “1”. BB's internal lottery flag (established flag, in this case also referred to as the aforementioned winning flag) is processed as an information command in the game. In addition, when this is used, the winning probability of BB (probability that BB is selected as a result of the internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to BB. Speaking of the above example (BB)
[Total number of random values corresponding to BB / Total number of random values in the extraction range]
Is 1/16384, and the winning probability of BB is 1/16384.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined (set), and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (BB), the random value “1” in the extraction range is the winning value corresponding to BB. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of BB is a continuous random value “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” in the extraction range, the range of the winning value of BB Is a random value from “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning BB”.

  From this, the range of winning values for all winning combinations is determined, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any winning combination by internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

  58 and 59 specifically show the winning values and the internal lottery probabilities for all winning combinations of the ball throwing spinning machine 1. FIG. Each of these is stored in advance in the main control board 400 (in detail, ROM) as a hit value determination table. The winning value determination table stores a plurality of winning value determination tables having different internal lottery probabilities for the normal state and all of the first to sixth service games (generally referred to as setting values, for example, setting) It can be set to any one of the six stages of setting values 1 to 6). 58 and 59 are hit value determination tables in the case of setting 1, for example, among the plurality of setting values.

  FIG. 58A is a winning value determination table (referred to as a normal determination table) showing a range of winning values for each winning combination and losing (a range of random values) in a game in a normal state (referred to as a normal game). Here, for BB and RB, the range of the winning value (only winning value per single winning) that is only BB or only RB, and “BB + other winning combination (service role, bell, watermelon, cherry)”, “ RB + other winning roles (service role, bell, watermelon, cherry) "," one small role (cherry) + other small roles different from the one small role (watermelon) " (Value per winning). In addition, the winning value of “service combination + winning combination (bell, watermelon, cherry)” may be further included.

  When BB or RB is won, the BB (RB) flag ON state is carried over until the next game, so even if BB symbols or RB symbols are not available in the game won BB or RB, the next BB symbols (RB symbols) can be aligned after the game. On the other hand, when winning other winning roles (service role, bell, watermelon, cherry), these winning flags will not be carried over after the next game. Is possible. Therefore, when the extracted random number value is a shared winning value of “BB (or RB) + other winning combination”, even if the BB symbol (or RB symbol) is not aligned in the game, the next game or later While it is possible to align, other winning roles (service role, bell, watermelon, cherry) symbols can not be aligned after the next game if they are not aligned in the selected game It becomes. However, among the other winning combinations, the service combination, bell, and watermelon can be arranged without having to go through pull-in control described later.

The single winning value of BB and RB corresponds to only one corresponding winning combination, like the single winning value of the bell or service combination. That is, in FIG. 58 (a), for example,
When the extracted random number value is “0”, it corresponds to the value for the single winning of Bell 1.
When the extracted random number value is “3000”, it corresponds to the value of Bell 2 alone winning.
When the extracted random number value is “3500”, it corresponds to the single winning value of service combination 1.
When the extracted random number value is “5200”, it corresponds to the single winning value of service combination 2.
When the extracted random number value is “2700”, it corresponds to a single winning value for watermelon.
Similarly,
When the extracted random number value is “5718”, it corresponds to the BB single winning value.
When the extracted random number value is “5837”, it corresponds to an RB single winning value.
Thus, only one winning combination corresponds to one extracted random number value.

On the other hand, the share winning value of BB and RB is, for example, in FIG.
When the extracted random number value is “5700”, it corresponds to the shared winning value of Bell 1 + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “5701”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of watermelon + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “5705”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of cherry + watermelon + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “5715”, it corresponds to the value for the shared winning of Bell 2 + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “5716”, it corresponds to the value of the shared winning of service combination 1 + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “5717”, it corresponds to the shared winning value of service combination 2 + BB.
When the extracted random number value is “5719”, it corresponds to the value for the shared winning of Bell 1 + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “5720”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of watermelon + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “5760”, it corresponds to a shared winning value of cherry + watermelon + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “5815”, it corresponds to the value for the shared winning of Bell 2 + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “5835”, it corresponds to the shared winning value of service combination 1 + RB.
When the extracted random number value is “5836”, it corresponds to the value for the shared winning of service combination 2 + RB.
As described above, a plurality of winning combinations correspond to one extracted random number value. As described above, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the shared winning value, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. This is because the two winning flags of BB and other winning combination (Bell or Cherry) or 2 of RB and other winning combination (Bell or Cherry) in the above-described flag processing (see Step S107 in FIG. 57). One winning flag (internal lottery flag) is set to ON simultaneously. In FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, the service combination is indicated as S combination.

  And for BB and RB, the range of the winning value obtained by summing (summing up) the single winning value and the shared winning value is the winning value for the entire BB and the entire RB. Winning probability can be calculated.

That is,
BB (Overall) 19/16384 (1 / 886.00)
RB (overall) 119/16384 (1 / 137.68)
Thus, the winning probability of the entire BB and the winning probability of the entire RB are calculated.

Furthermore, by adding the winning probability of the entire BB and the winning probability of the entire RB,
Bonus (Overall) 138/16384 (1 / 118.72)
In this way, the winning probability of the entire bonus (including BB and RB) is calculated. In other words, the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment plays a bonus role with an RB having a smaller number of prize balls in a single bonus game than a BB having a large number of prize balls in a bonus game. (That is, it is easier to win RB than BB). A bonus winning probability advantageous to the player of approximately 1/100 is realized, and the player can easily play with a relatively low budget. In other words, the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 is not intended for the player to acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short period of time, but continues to RB as the game is played for a relatively long period of time. The game has a game of gradually increasing the number of balls held by winning.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), in this embodiment, there is no single winning value for cherry, and a shared winning value with other winning combinations is always set for cherry. Specifically, the shared winning value of Cherry and other small roles is shown in FIG.
When the extracted random number value is “2950”, it corresponds to the winning value of cherry + watermelon.
In this way, the watermelon is won in duplicate for the extracted random value that wins the cherry. Also, with regard to the shared winning value that Cherry wins with bonuses (BB, RB), other small roles (in this case, watermelons) are always also won. That is, only “cherry + watermelon + BB (RB)” is set as the winning combination of cherry and bonus.

  On the other hand, FIG. 59 (c) is a winning value determination table (referred to as a bonus game determining table) showing ranges of winning values (random number values) of winning combinations and losers in bonus games (BB game and RB game). .

  According to this, during the bonus game (BB game and RB game), lottery of BB and RB and further service combination (service combination 1 and service combination 2) is not performed. During the bonus game, the winning value of the bonus exclusive combination that is effective only at this time (the winning value will exist) occupies most of the extraction range (the total number of winning values is 12553). Therefore, it can be said that during the bonus game, the bonus special combination is often won about three times in four times. In addition, instead of the bonus value of bonus bonus combination increasing, the winning value corresponding to the loss is greatly reduced (total number of winning values is 1). For this reason, it can be said that during the bonus game, the possibility of being extremely lost compared to the base game is reduced.

  According to this, during the bonus game, only the winning combination (Bell 1, Watermelon, Cherry + Watermelon, Bell 2, Bonus exclusive role) that has received a prize ball and has not been missed will be won. For this reason, the player can easily obtain a prize ball without having to press the player almost every time during the bonus game.

  In the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, a service game is started in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition. In the present embodiment, there are a total of five service games: a first service game, a second service game, a third service game, a fourth service game, and a fifth service game.

  Here, the service game is a game in which the winning probability of the service role is easier to win than the base game for a predetermined number of games (game period) (except for the first service game). . The ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a first service game to a fifth service game having different winning probabilities of service roles as service games, each having different entry conditions and end conditions. In the following, unless otherwise specified, the term “service game” includes all of the first service game to the fifth service game.

  Hereinafter, the characteristics of each service game determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

  FIG. 58B is a winning value determination table (referred to as a first service game determination table (ST1)) showing a range of winning values for each winning combination and lose in the first service game (range of random values). As shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the first service game determination table, since there is no single winning value for service combination 2, service combination 2 cannot be won alone. Compared with the normal game determination table shown in FIG. 58 (a), the random number width of the single winning value of service combination 2 is set to be included in the random number width of the single winning value of service combination 1. The probability that one service game is won as a base game and a service role as a whole is equal. Except for these points, the first service game determination table and the base game determination table have the same random number width for each winning combination. In the first service game, the number of game balls held by the player decreases as the game progresses. This first service game is not a bonus game (BB game or RB game) and is a first service game to a fourth service game that can be performed when neither BB nor RB is won. This is the most disadvantageous service game for a player because the number of game balls held by the player is rapidly decreasing.

  FIG. 58 (c) is a winning value determination table (referred to as a second service game determination table (ST2)) indicating a range of winning values for each winning combination and lose in the second service game (range of random values). As shown in FIG. 58 (c), in the second service game determination table, since there is no single winning value for service combination 2, service combination 2 cannot be won alone. Compared with the first service game determination table described above, the random value width of the single winning value of the service combination 1 is set to be extremely large, and the random number width of the winning value of the lost role is set to be extremely narrow. In addition to the service combination and the loss, the second service game determination table and the base game determination table are set to have the same random number width for each winning combination. In this second service game, the random number range of the single per-service value for the service combination 1 is set to be extremely large and the random number range of the hit value for the lost game is set to be extremely narrow, which is not as high as during BB or RB. A game can be performed while the number of game balls held by the person increases. That is, in this second service game, the probability that the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning a small role during the predetermined game is larger than the number of game balls consumed to perform the predetermined game. Because it is set, the number of possessed balls can increase as the game progresses. For example, the number of game balls consumed to play 10 games is 150, but the probability of losing so that the number of prize balls paid out by winning a small role during these 10 games exceeds 150 And winning probabilities for small roles are set. The second service game, which will be described in detail later, can be performed when the bonus game (BB game or RB game) is not being played and neither BB nor RB is won. Among the four service games, the number of possession balls possessed by the player increases, so this is the most advantageous service game for the player.

  FIG. 58 (d) is a winning value determination table (referred to as a third service game determination table (ST3)) indicating the range of winning values for each winning combination and lose in the third service game (range of random values). As shown in FIG. 58 (d), in the third service game determination table, since there is no single winning value for service combination 2, service combination 2 cannot be won alone. Compared with the first service game determination table described above, the random number width of the single winning value of the service combination 1 is set to be relatively large, and the random number width of the winning value of the loser is set to be relatively narrow. Note that, except for the service combination and the loss, the third service game determination table and the base game determination table are set to have the same random number width for each winning combination. In the third service game, although the game balls held by the player are slightly reduced, it is possible to play a game while suppressing the decrease of the game balls. Therefore, the player can play a game without greatly reducing the number of game balls held. The third service game, which will be described in detail later, can be executed when the bonus game (BB game or RB game) is not being played and neither BB nor RB is won. Among the four service games, this is the third most advantageous service game for the player, but it is also a gaming state in which there is no risk of falling into the first service game.

  FIG. 59 (a) is a winning value determination table (referred to as a fourth service game determination table (ST4)) showing a range of winning values for each winning combination and lose in the fourth service game (range of random values). As shown in FIG. 59 (a), in the fourth service game determination table, there are single winning values for service combination 1 and service combination 2 as in the normal game, but when compared with the first service game determination table described above. The random number width of the single per service role value is set large, and the random number width of the winning hit value is set narrow. In addition to the service combination and the loss, the fourth service game determination table and the base game determination table have the same random number width for each winning combination. In the fourth service game, it is possible to play a game while substantially maintaining the amount of game balls held by the player. The fourth service game, which will be described in detail later, is the first service game to the second game that can be performed when the bonus game (BB game or RB game) is not being won and neither BB nor RB is won. Among the four service games, the service game is the second most advantageous game for the player, but it is also a gaming state in which there is a risk of falling to the first service game.

  FIG. 59B is a winning value determination table showing a range of winning values for each winning combination and losing in the fifth service game (random value range) (referred to as fifth service game determination table (ST5)). As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the fifth service game determination table, compared to the above-mentioned normal game determination table, the random number width of the winning value of the loss is almost the same, while the single winning value of the bonus and the bonus Since there is no per-duplication value, you cannot win a bonus. Note that the random number widths of other small roles (bell, watermelon, service role, etc.) are almost equal to those of the normal game determination table. Although details will be described later in this fifth service game, the number of game balls held by the player decreases as the game progresses.

[Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping the reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c) is waited. FIG. 60 shows the content of reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to an internal lottery flag indicating the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns are prepared in advance for all the internal lottery flags, and these are stored in the main control board 400 (in detail, ROM) as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the internal lottery flag in the above step S201, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 10a, 10b, 10c is accepted (steps S202, S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, 10c is pressed. Until the depressing operation of all the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c is accepted, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c are received (stop operation procedure) is the stop operation procedure (or the press sequence) called “forward press”, “reverse press”, and “middle press”, respectively. Say).

The above-described “forward press” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 301a first (that is, a procedure for pressing the left reel stop button 10a first). From the reel operation order to stop after
[Left reel → Middle reel → Right reel],
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [Left reel → Right reel → Middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “forward push”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure may also be called “order scissors push”.

The above-described “reverse push” stop operation procedure is an operation procedure in which the right reel 301c is stopped first as opposed to “forward push” (that is, a procedure of first pressing the right reel stop button 10c). From the operation order of the reels to be stopped after the second,
[Right reel-> middle reel-> left reel]
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [right reel → left reel → middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “reverse pressing”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure is sometimes called “reverse scissor pressing”.

The “intermediate push” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 301b first (that is, a procedure for pressing the middle reel stop button 10b first). From the operation order of reels to be stopped later,
[Center reel → Left reel → Right reel],
Or
The operation is further divided into two stop operation procedures [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “middle press”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 10a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 10a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the stop operation procedure of “forward pressing” from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c, step S202. Is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop process, the control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag.

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, the effective lines of the ball throwing spinning machine 1 are the four lines of the right-down line 623b, the right-up line 623a, the V-shaped line 624a, and the inverted V-shaped line 624b. It is possible to arrange the winning symbols in any line. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 14 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper or lower position is the winning symbol. If the symbol has a possibility, select a reel stop control table that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the active line based on the symbol. Will do. As a result, winning symbols other than the bonus symbol and cherry symbol can be aligned without the need for pressing (details will be described in reel stop control).

  This point will be described in detail. For example, it is assumed that a symbol that may become a winning symbol stops at the upper position of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) in the symbol display window 14. In this case, one of the reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols of the remaining reels 301b and 301c on both the right-down line 623 and the V-shaped line 624a is selected. Similarly, when a symbol that may become a winning combination symbol stops at the lower position of the left reel 301a, the corresponding winnings of the remaining reels 301b and 301c are added to both the right-up line 623a and the inverted V-shaped line 624b. One of the reel stop control tables capable of aligning the role symbols will be selected.

  That is, in the “forward push” stop operation procedure, only the left reel 301a is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the upper position or the lower position, the corresponding winning combination is still in either of the two active lines. It is possible to align the symbols. Accordingly, at the stage of step S206, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 10b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 10b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning combination symbol is executed based on the reel control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). . At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 10c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made. That is, in step S201, if the right reel stop button 10c is first pressed (first) along the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c, The determinations in steps S202 and S210 are not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S217. Step S217 and subsequent steps are processed in the same manner as steps S203, S204, 206, S206, and S208 described above. That is, since the right reel stop button 10c is pressed first (first), the determinations in steps S217 and S218 are satisfied, and the first reel stop process is performed for the right reel 301c (step S219). Then, the reel stop control table for the remaining left reel 301a and middle reel 301b is determined (step S221), and the first reel stop flag and the right reel stop flag RF are set to ON (steps S222 and S223).

  Thereafter, based on the reel stop control table determined in step S221, the left reel stop process (step S205) and the middle reel stop process (step S213) are performed in the order in which the left reel stop button 10a and the middle reel stop button 10b are pressed. Executed according to In the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, just as in the “forward push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is in a stopped state, and there is either winning symbol in the upper position or the lower position. In such a case, it is still possible to align the corresponding winning symbol in any of the two active lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

  By the way, in the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above description, and therefore, description will be given below. That is, in step S201, when the middle reel stop button 10b is first depressed (first) in accordance with the “middle push” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the depression operation of the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c, The determination at S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S210. Steps S210 and thereafter are processed in the same manner as steps S203, S204, 206, S206, and S208 described above. That is, since the middle reel stop button 10b is pressed first (first), the determinations in steps S210 and S211 are satisfied, and the first reel stop process is performed for the middle reel 301b (step S212). Then, the reel stop control tables for the remaining left reel 301a and right reel 301c are determined (step S214), and the first reel stop flag and the middle reel stop flag MF are set to ON (steps S215 and S216).

  Thereafter, based on the reel stop control table determined in step S216, the left reel stop process (step S205) and the right reel stop process (step S220) are performed in the order in which the left reel stop button 10a and the right reel stop button 10c are pressed. Executed according to Here, in the case of “middle press”, unlike the step S206 in the “forward press” (or step S221 in the “reverse press”), the corresponding winning symbol is still aligned on any of the four active lines at this point. It is possible. In other words, if the symbol at the middle position among the stops of the first stop reel (in this case, the middle reel 301b) is a symbol that may become the winning symbol, it is on the effective line based on that symbol. Then, the reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning symbols of the remaining reels (the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c) is selected.

  This point will be described in detail. For example, it is assumed that a symbol that may become a winning combination symbol stops at the middle position of the first stop reel (in this case, the middle reel 301b) in the symbol display window 14. In this case, since all of the right-down line 623b, the right-up line 623a, the V-shaped line 624a, and the inverted V-shaped line 624b have the middle stop position of the middle reel 301b as the effective stop position, The corresponding winning symbols of the remaining reels 301a and 301c can be aligned. Therefore, in the case of “middle push”, the corresponding winning symbols of the remaining reels 301b and 301c are aligned on any of the downward-right line 623b, the V-shaped line 624a, the upward-right line 623a, and the inverted V-shaped line 624b. One of the possible reel stop control tables is selected.

  That is, in the “middle push” stop operation procedure, when only the middle reel 301b is in a stopped state and there is a winning combination symbol at the middle position, it is still possible to align the corresponding winning symbol on any of the four active lines. is there. Therefore, at the stage of step S216, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In this embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be determined as appropriate when constructing the control program.

[Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control is performed to pull the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 14 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control, with a predetermined number of frames as the upper limit) Drawing in). Specifically, for example, three frames are determined in advance as a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 14 (hereinafter referred to as a pull-in controllable range) when a reel stop operation by the player is accepted. If there is a corresponding winning combination symbol within the range, control is performed to draw the symbol into the symbol display window 14 and stop the reel. Here, the “pull-in controllable range” refers to the maximum number of frames that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel after the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. For example, if the retractable range is a maximum of 3 frames, it is possible to display up to the third symbol in the reel rotation direction from the position when the reel stop operation is accepted at a predetermined position (for example, middle stage). It becomes. That is, it is possible to draw a symbol in a range of less than 3 frames at maximum (more specifically, a range obtained by subtracting one step from 3 frames). Note that one frame is from one symbol to another symbol adjacent in the reel rotation direction.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 14 when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning symbol is within a range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be stopped after being moved into the symbol display window 14. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 14 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  When the winning combination other than bonuses (BB, RB) and cherries becomes the establishment flag, the ball throwing / rotating machine 1 can always make the corresponding winning combination symbols without requiring the player's attention. This is because for the bell, watermelon, and service combination, at least one corresponding winning combination symbol is disposed within the pull-in controllable range. Note that bonus bonus combinations can also be arranged without needing to be viewed.

  Here, the reel stop control of each symbol reel 301a, 301b, 301c when each reel stop button 10a, 10b, 10c is operated will be described. In the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 of this embodiment, 14 symbols are written on each reel band 381a, 381b, 381c, and the drawing-in control of the symbols is performed up to 3 frames.

  As described above, five types of symbols are written on the reel band 381a, and the position on the effective line in the left reel 301a is, as described above, of the upper, middle, and lower levels displayed on the symbol display window 14. Upper and lower stages. Here, since there are two frames between the upper stage and the lower stage, it is possible to perform pull-in control with respect to a symbol written in an arbitrary five-frame range, no matter what eye-pushing operation is performed. That is, it is possible to always perform pull-in control for the symbols written on the reel band 381a every five frames. 51, S man, M child, E man and H man are written in an arbitrary range of 5 frames (that is, no matter which 5 frames are seen, S man, M child , E man and H man are shown). As a result, no matter what the player pushes, the S man, M child, E man and H man are stopped at the position (upper or lower) on the effective line by the pull-in control. For red 7, when the symbol No. 11 to 14 is positioned on the effective line and the eye is pressed, it stops at the position on the effective line (however, SEQ ID No. 1 or 2 is in the lower row). (If you push your eyes when you are positioned, Red 7 can stop at the top).

  In addition, four types of symbols are written on the reel band 381b, and the position on the effective line in the middle reel 301b is, as described above, only the middle level among the upper, middle, and lower levels displayed on the symbol display window 14. It is. Therefore, with respect to the symbols written in the range of arbitrary three frames, the pull-in control can be performed no matter what the pushing operation is performed. In other words, it is possible to always perform pull-in control for the symbols written on the reel band 381b every three frames. Thus, when looking at FIG. 51, I man and T child are written in an arbitrary range of 3 frames (that is, I man and T child are written in any 3 frames). . As a result, no matter what the player presses, the I man and the T child are stopped at the position (middle stage) on the effective line by the pull-in control. In addition, about red 7, it stops in a middle stage only when pushing down operation when the design of sequence number 11-14 is located in a middle stage. In addition, as for M man, when the eye-pushing operation is performed when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 12 to 14 and SEQ ID NO: 1 are located in the middle stage, they do not stop in the middle stage. Therefore, even if the cherry is selected, if the player performs a pressing operation when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 12 to 14 and SEQ ID NO: 1 are located in the middle stage, the cherry symbols are not aligned (so-called “missing out” ), And 60 prize balls will not be paid out if the cherry symbols are ready.

  In addition, six types of symbols are written on the reel band 381c, and the position on the effective line on the right reel 301c is, as described above, the upper, middle, and lower of the upper, middle, and lower displayed on the symbol display window 14. The bottom row. Here, since there are two frames between the upper stage and the lower stage, it is possible to perform pull-in control with respect to a symbol written in an arbitrary five-frame range, no matter what eye-pushing operation is performed. That is, it is possible to always perform pull-in control for the symbols written on the reel band 381c every five frames. Thus, looking at FIG. 51, E man, M child and H man are written within an arbitrary range of 5 frames (that is, E man, M child and H man can be seen in any 5 frames). Is written). As a result, no matter what the player pushes, the E male, M child, and H male are stopped at the position (upper or lower) on the active line by the pull-in control. On the other hand, when red 7 is pressed when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 11 to 14 are located on the effective line, it stops at the position on the effective line (however, SEQ ID NO: 1 or 2 is in the lower row). (If you push your eyes when you are positioned, Red 7 can stop at the top). In addition, when white 7 is pressed when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 2 to 5 are located on the effective line, the white 7 stops at the position on the effective line (however, SEQ ID NO: 6 or 7 is in the lower row). In the case where the user presses the eye when it is positioned, the white 7 can stop at the upper stage). Furthermore, for male S, when the symbols of SEQ ID NOS: 11 and 12 are pressed when the symbols are located in the upper stage, they do not stop at the position on the effective line. However, as described above, even if S male wins any of the small roles, it does not fall under the combination symbol constituting the small role as the winning role, and the winning role is a service role It does not correspond to the combination. Therefore, even if the S man is not necessarily written in the range of any five frames, the winning service combination or the winning small combination is not missed.

  In this way, of the service roles and small roles, only the cherry may be missed even though they are elected. Therefore, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning value per single winning of the cherry that may be missed is eliminated, and the winning is always overlapped with other roles. For example, referring to FIG. 58 (a), the extracted random numbers 2950 to 2999 are shared winning values for cherry and watermelon, and the extracted random values 5705 to 5714 are shared winning values for cherry, watermelon and BB. The extracted random numbers 5760 to 5814 are values for the winning of sharing between cherry, watermelon and RB. As a result, even if a cherry is won and the cherry tree is missed due to a missed push operation, the other winning combination is stopped on the active line and the other winning winning symbol Will be complete.

  Here, among the symbols written on the reel bands 381a, 381b, 381c, the symbols that can be drawn are as follows.

  When there are a plurality of positions on the effective line displayed in the symbol display window 14, the maximum number of frames between one position on the effective line and the other position is M (when there is one position on the effective line). Is M = 0), and if the number of frames that can be pulled in is N, symbols can be pulled in from the position of the reel bands 381a, 381b, 381c when the stop operation is performed up to (N + M) frames. Here, the “maximum number of frames” is 2 frames when both the upper stage and the lower stage are located on the effective line (2 frames even if the middle stage is located on the effective line), and the upper and middle stages are effective. If it is located on the line, it is one frame. Similarly, when the middle stage and the lower stage are located on the effective line, one frame is provided.

  When the number of symbols displayed on the reel band is greater than the number N of frames that can be pulled in, it is impossible to pull in all symbols, and there are at least two symbols that can be missed. For example, in the case of the middle reel band 381b of the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least three frames (sequence numbers 9 to 11, 10-12, or 11-13), M man cannot be written, and similarly, at least three frames (for example, SEQ ID NOs: 6-8, 7-9, 8) in which M man is written This is because red 7 cannot be written in 10 to 10).

By the way, in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 of the present embodiment, the small part (cherry) with the most payout is
Even if you win, it is a small role that is not always pulled in (a small role that may be missed). That is, the part (sequence number 9-11, 10-12) where the symbol (M man) corresponding to the small part (cherry) with the most payouts is not written within the range of any three frames (number of frames that can be controlled). Or 11-13). In other words, the symbol (M male) corresponding to the small payout (cherry) with the largest payout is written on the middle reel band 381b beyond the range of the number of frames that can be pulled in.

  In this way, a gaming machine that is supported by everyone is provided by making the winning value shared with the small role (cherry) that can be missed and the service role and small role (bell, watermelon) that can always be pulled in. It becomes possible. In other words, if you are a player who has the skill that you can always push without losing when you win the cherry, you can enjoy the most prize ball payout in the small role by aligning the cherry pattern, and a sense of superiority It is possible to soak. Also, even if you are a player who can't always win the cherry, the winning ball is not paid out in the past because the cherries are won repeatedly with other small roles that cannot always be missed. However, when the other small role symbols are prepared, the payout of the prize ball can be enjoyed, and the loss feeling given to the player can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is supported by both a player with a high level of skill and a player with a low level of skill. Furthermore, even if the player misses the cherry when winning the cherry, fewer prize balls will be paid out than the number of prize balls (60) that will be paid out when the cherry symbols are aligned, so there will be an excessive loss for the hole. It will not be. This makes it possible to achieve a balance between the player and the hall.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning value shared by the service combination and all the small combinations and BB or RB is set, even if the service combination symbol or any of the small combination symbols is prepared, BB A game or RB game may be played. Thereby, the player has a sense of expectation that the winning combination with BB or RB may be won every time the small role symbols are arranged, and the game can be reduced from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the winning value shared with all the small roles and BB or RB is set, if the extracted random number value is the winning value shared with BB or RB, the BB symbol or RB will fail. Even if the symbols cannot be arranged, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the small winning symbols won in duplicate are consumed and the game balls are consumed in vain.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the greater the number of winning ball payouts (acquired number) when the small roles are aligned, the higher the probability that the winning combination with BB or RB is duplicated. This is illustrated in FIG. ) Will be described.

  The number of single winnings of service roles (service role 1 and service role 2) is 2200, and the number of shared winnings that does not overlap with BB and RB and overlaps with other small roles is 0, shared with BB or RB The number of winning points is 4. Therefore, when a service combination is won, the BB or RB is won with a probability of approximately 1/551.

  Bells (Bell 1 and Bell 2) have a single winning value of 3200, do not overlap with BB and RB, and do not overlap with other small roles, and the number of shared winnings is 0, shared winning value with BB or RB Is 23. Therefore, when winning the bell, the BB or RB is won with a probability of about 1/140. The bell is the main small role having the highest appearance rate, and when the bell symbols are arranged, 25 prize balls are paid out. Here, the “appearance rate” is the frequency of alignment on the effective line (the same applies hereinafter in this specification).

  The number of watermelon single wins is 250, the number per share win that does not overlap with BB and RB and overlaps with other small roles (cherries) is 50, the number per share win with BB or RB (BB 109 is also included (including overlapping roles of RB and cherry). Therefore, when winning a watermelon, it is a BB or RB winning with a probability of approximately 1 to 3/4. The watermelon appearance rate is extremely lower than the bell appearance rate, and the watermelon appearance rate in the present embodiment is approximately one-eighth of the bell appearance rate. When the watermelon symbols are ready, 45 prize balls are paid out.

  The number of cherries per single winning is zero, the number per shared winning that does not overlap with BB and RB and overlaps with other small roles (watermelon) is 50, and the number per shared winning with BB or RB is 65 It is. Therefore, when winning the cherry, the winning of the BB or RB is almost a half of the probability. Cherry is a rare role with the lowest appearance rate. Moreover, as described above, even if the cherry is won, it may be missed, so the appearance rate of the cherry is lower than the winning probability of the cherry. When the cherry symbols are arranged, 60 prize balls are paid out.

  In this way, when a small role is won, a small role with a low appearance rate has a higher expectation that the winning combination overlaps with BB or RB, while the small role has a high appearance rate. Even if it does not exclude duplicate winning with BB or RB. This ensures that the player always has a sense of expectation due to the fact that the small role symbols are aligned, and that the expectation varies depending on the aligned small role symbols. I will be angry. In addition, the rare small role (cherry) that has the highest probability of being duplicated with BB or RB may be missed, and even if it is missed, other winning roles (watermelon if small role) can be arranged. . As a result, even if the rare small role symbol that has the highest probability of being won simultaneously with BB or RB is not available, the player must play the game while thinking, “Did you miss the rare small role symbol?” As a result, the game is played with a sense of expectation that "Is it actually a duplicate of BB or RB?" Thereby, it becomes possible to give a player a sense of expectation, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the service role symbol or small role symbol is complete, the greater the number of prize balls to be paid out, the higher the expectation that BB or RB will be won. Thus, the expectation of the BB game or the RB game that can acquire more prize balls is increased, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the case of a winning combination of a winning value shared by a BB symbol (or RB symbol) and a small role, the BB symbol (or RB symbol) is preferentially drawn. However, since the BB symbol (or RB symbol) is a symbol that needs to be pressed, when the BB symbol (or RB symbol) is not retractable (when it is outside the retractable control range), the other winning symbol Shall be drawn in. And as already demonstrated, it becomes possible at this time to arrange the other winning combination symbols without missing them. Accordingly, when the winning combination of the value per shared winning is applicable, either the BB symbol or the other winning combination (small role) symbol can always be aligned. Note that the priority order of the symbols drawn preferentially is the order of service role symbol, BB symbol (or RB symbol), and small role symbol. The pull-in control of the value for shared winning will be described in detail separately.

  From the above, in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, winning symbols other than bonus symbols (BB symbols, RB symbols) and cherry symbols can be arranged without needing to press. In other words, the winning combination other than the bonus (BB, RB) and cherry will not cause “missing”. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the difference in profits between players due to the difference in the skill level (such as a large difference in the number of winning balls).

[Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, whether or not the winning combination symbols are aligned on any active line in the symbol display window 14 (whether the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed) or not. Make a decision. In FIG. 61, the content of this determination process is demonstrated concretely.

  When all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are aligned on any active line from the stop eye mode in the symbol display window 14 (the winning combination is selected). It is determined whether or not a corresponding symbol combination mode is displayed. It should be noted that the stop eye particularly when all the reels are in a stopped state is sometimes referred to as an outcome.

  In steps S301 and S303, it is determined whether an RB game is being played or a BB game is being played. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of game state flags, which will be described later, an RB game flag and a BB game flag.

  If the RB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S301 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S380. If the BB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S303 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S370.

  If both the RB game flag and the BB game flag are OFF (= 0), the determinations in steps S301 and S303 are not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S310.

  After executing the service game end determination process (details will be described later) in step S310, the following steps S320, S330, S340, S350, S360 are further performed according to the winning combination symbols that are aligned on any active line. Move on to either.

  In step S320, it is determined whether BB symbols are available. When the BB symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines (“red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S322.

  In the next step S322, a BB game start process is executed. Here, as a BB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games in which winning balls can be easily obtained is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S330, it is determined whether RB symbols are available. When the RB symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines (“red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-white 7 symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S332.

  In the next step S332, an RB game start process is executed. In this case, as the RB game, processing is performed so that a plurality of games that are easy to acquire prize balls according to the BB game are concentrated and performed (details will be described later).

  In the next step S340, it is determined whether or not the service combination symbols are available. If the service combination symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S342. In the present embodiment, in step S340, either of the service role 1 symbol ("H male symbol-I male symbol-H male symbol") or the service role 2 symbol ("H male symbol-T child symbol-H male symbol"). When all the information is collected, it is determined that the service combination symbols are prepared.

  In the next step S342, a service game process is executed. In this service game process, a MAX bet command is sent to the main control board 400 (in detail, RAM) in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Remember once. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a service game.

  Then, after executing a service game demotion determination process (details will be described later) in step S344, in step S346, the service combination winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) and the process ends. Specifically, as a single winning combination, if service combination 1 is won, service combination 1 winning flag is set to OFF (= 0), and if service combination 2 is selected, service combination 2 winning flag is set. Set to OFF (= 0).

  If it is determined that the service combination and bonus shared winning combination (service combination 1, 2 + BB, RB) is won and it is determined in step S340 that the service combination symbols are complete, the service combination selection is performed in step S356. Although the flag is turned off (= 0), the bonus flag (BB flag, RB flag) is not turned off (= 0) but is carried on from the next game on (= 1).

  In step S350, it is determined whether the small role symbols are available. If the small role symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S352. In this embodiment, in step S350, a bell 1 symbol ("M child symbol-T child symbol-M child symbol"), a bell 2 symbol ("M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol"), a watermelon symbol ( When any one of “E male symbol-I male symbol-E male symbol”) and cherry symbol (“ANY-M male symbol-ANY”) is aligned, it is determined that the small role symbols are aligned.

  In the next step S352, a specified number of prize balls are paid out in accordance with the arranged small role symbols (a specified number of prize balls are paid out from the game ball payout device 18). Note that the number of payout balls may be displayed on a payout number display LED (for example, a 7-segment LED) (not shown). Thereby, it is possible to notify (notify and display) to the player that the specified number of prize balls corresponding to the small combination has been paid out.

  In step S354, after a service game table (hereinafter referred to as ST) promotion determination process (details will be described later) is executed, in step S356, the corresponding small role winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) and the process is performed. finish. Specifically, as a single winning role, if the player has won the bell 1, the bell 1 winning flag is turned OFF (= 0), and if the player has won the bell 2, the bell 2 winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If the watermelon is won, the watermelon winning flag is turned off (= 0), and if the cherry is won, the cherry winning flag is turned off (= 0).

  If the single winning combination (cherry + watermelon) of the small roles is won, it is determined in step S350 that only one of the cherry symbols and the watermelon symbols is complete, but step S356. In, both the cherry winning flag and the watermelon winning flag are set to OFF (= 0) regardless of which symbols are arranged.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shared winning combination of the small role and bonus (small role + BB, RB) is won and it is determined in step S350 that the small role symbols are aligned, the winning flag for the small role is determined in step S366. Is turned off (= 0), but the bonus flag (BB flag, RB flag) is not turned off (= 0) but is carried on from the next game on (= 1).

  Next, when none of the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line, none of the above determinations in steps S320, S330, S340, and S350 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S360. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”.

  In step S360, a losing process is executed. In this losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than BB and RB, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Therefore, if the winning flag does not correspond to either the BB flag or the RB flag, “missing” is determined at this point. In addition, although it is only the cherry as a single winning combination that may cause “spilling out”, there is no cherry as a single winning combination in the ball throwing spinning machine 1 of this embodiment, and all the cherries are It is a shared winning role with other small roles (watermelon). In other words, as mentioned above, when winning a cherry, be sure to double-win with a watermelon, which is a small role without “missing”. For this reason, in this embodiment, even if the cherry is missed, the watermelons are always prepared, so that there is no winning combination that causes “missing”.

  Further, when the winning flag corresponds to either the BB flag or the RB flag, the winning flag is not turned OFF and is carried over after the next game. As a result, the winning flag is carried over until the corresponding winning combination symbols can be aligned without causing any loss of BB and RB. Therefore, the player can play the game with a sense of security that BB and RB game benefits can be obtained without worrying about losing a winning role with higher profitability than other winning roles such as BB and RB. You can face it. In particular, for a player with a low level of skill, the practice of pressing can be repeated any number of times until the BB symbols (or RB symbols) are aligned.

  The process from step S310 to step S360 is a process executed in the case of a base game or a service game. Next, the processing after step S370 will be described. The process here is a process executed in the case of a BB game and an RB game.

  First, in step S370, it is determined whether or not the BB game payout symbols are available. The “BB game payout” here is a collective term for a winning combination in which a prize ball is paid out during a BB game including a bonus game exclusive role in addition to a bell, a watermelon, and a cherry. Then, when the BB game payout symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S372.

  In the next step S372, a specified number of prize balls are paid out according to the BB game payout symbols that are aligned (the specified number of prize balls are paid out from the game ball payout device 18). Note that the number of payout balls may be displayed on a payout number display LED (for example, a 7-segment LED) (not shown). Thus, it is possible to notify (notify and display) to the player that a specified number of prize balls corresponding to the BB game payout combination has been paid out.

  Subsequent to step S372, in step S374, a BB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S376, and a service game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S370 is not satisfied, the process moves to step 378, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). In the present embodiment, no miss-out occurs, and therefore the lost flag corresponds to the establishment flag. That is, in step S378, the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Next, step S380 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S380, it is determined whether or not the RB game payout symbols are available. This “RB game payout” is also a collective term for the winning roles that have been paid out during the RB game in the same way as the above-mentioned BB game payout (in this case, a dedicated role for bell, watermelon, cherry, bonus game) Is applicable). If there are RB game payout symbols on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S382.

  In the next step S382, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out in accordance with the RB game payout symbols that are aligned (a specified number of prize balls are paid out from the game ball payout device 18). Note that the number of payout balls may be displayed on a payout number display LED (for example, a 7-segment LED) (not shown). Thereby, it is possible to notify (notify and display) to the player that a specified number of prize balls corresponding to the RB game payout combination has been paid out.

  Following step S382, in step S384, an RB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S386, and a service game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S380 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378 described above, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). Since this was demonstrated previously, description is abbreviate | omitted.

[BB game start processing]
If the determination in step S320 of FIG. 61 is satisfied, the BB game start process is executed. This BB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether the BB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the BB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the BB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the BB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the BB game is started with the same 3 bets (15) as in the normal game.

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the BB symbols are aligned even though the BB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when the ball throwing / rotating machine 1 has failed. Therefore, in the error processing, the error display lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made for notifying the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[BB game end determination process]
Subsequently, the BB game end determination process in step S374 of FIG. 61 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of the prize ball in step S372 of FIG. 61 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the BB game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether the cumulative number of payouts has exceeded 1400. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, where the cumulative number of payouts in the BB game is displayed (displayed on a payout number display LED, etc., not shown). It may be provided separately and displayed on this). If the determination in step S452 is satisfied, the process moves to step S460.

  In step S460, after the BB game flag is turned OFF (= 0), the third service game start flag is turned ON (= 1) in step S462, and the process is ended.

[RB game start processing]
If the determination in step S330 in FIG. 61 is satisfied, an RB game start process is executed. This RB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether the RB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S501 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the RB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the RB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S506, the cumulative payout number count during the RB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the RB game is started with the same 3 bet (15) as in the normal game. As a result, the player can play the game without feeling special discomfort compared to the normal game.

  If the determination in step S501 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S502, and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where RB symbols are aligned even though the RB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when the ball throwing / rotating machine 1 has failed. Therefore, in the error processing, the error display lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made for notifying the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[RB game end determination processing]
Next, the RB game end determination process in step S384 of FIG. 61 described above will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S551, in response to the payout of prize balls in step S382 of FIG. 61 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the RB game.

  In step S552, it is determined whether the cumulative number of payouts has exceeded 525. If the determination in step S552 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S554, where the cumulative payout number in the RB game is displayed (displayed on a payout number display LED, etc., not shown. The cumulative payout number is a display LED, etc. It may be provided separately and displayed on this).

  If the determination in step S552 is satisfied, the process moves to step S556.

  In step S556, the RB game flag is set to OFF (= 0), and then in step S558, the fourth service game start flag is set to ON (= 1), and the process ends.

[ST demotion determination processing]
The ST demotion determination process in step S344 in FIG. 61 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether either the BB flag or the RB flag is ON (= 1). When this determination is satisfied, in the game,
-Bonus (BB, RB) and service role (service role 1, service role 2) won the shared winning role, not the bonus symbol (BB symbol, RB symbol), service role symbol (service role 1 symbol, service role) When 2 symbols) are available-With the bonus flag (BB, RB) on (= 1) and carried over, the service role (service role 1, service role 2) will be elected as the single winning role One of the cases where the symbols (service combination 1 symbol, service combination 2 symbols) are prepared corresponds.

  Then, when the determination in step S601 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, the fifth service game start flag is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S615, and a service game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S601 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S605 to determine whether the service combination 2 symbols are available. That is, when it is determined in step S340 described above that the service role symbols are available, it is determined whether the service role symbol is the service role 2 symbol ("H male symbol-T child symbol-H male symbol"). Then, if the service combination 2 symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S607.

  In step S607, it is determined whether the normal game flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the normal game. If the determination in step S607 is not satisfied, it is determined in step S609 whether the third service game flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the third service game. If the determination in step S609 is not satisfied, it is determined in step S611 whether the fourth service game flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the fourth service game. If the determination in step S611 is not satisfied, that is, if the gaming state is not any of the base game, the third service game, and the fourth service game, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination is satisfied in any of steps S607, S609, and S611, that is, if the gaming state is controlled by any of the base game, the third service game, and the fourth service game, the process proceeds to step S613. In step S613, the first service game start flag is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S615, and a service game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

  In this embodiment, since there is no single winning value for service combination 2 in the third service game (see FIG. 58 (d)), it is actually possible that YES in S605 and YES in S609. Absent. That is, since it is always determined as NO in S605, the first service game start flag is not turned ON. Also, in the third service game, since there is a shared winning value between the service combination 2 and the bonus combination (BB or RB), the service combination 2 may be combined with the bonus combination and the service combination pattern may be aligned. In this case, however, the first service game start flag is never turned ON because it is always determined YES in S601. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is no single winning value for the service combination 2 in the third service game. However, the service combination 2 may be selected with a very low probability.

[ST promotion judgment processing]
The ST promotion determination process in step S354 of FIG. 61 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether either the BB flag or the RB flag is ON (= 1). When this determination is satisfied, in the game,
-Bonus (BB, RB) and small role (Bell 1, Bell 2, watermelon, cherry) won the shared winning role, not a bonus symbol (BB symbol, RB symbol), small role symbol (Bell 1 symbol, Bell) When 2 symbols, watermelon symbol, cherry symbol) are complete ・ In the state where the bonus flag (BB, RB) is carried on with ON (= 1), the small role (bell 1, bell 2, watermelon, cherry) alone One of cases where a winning combination or a shared winning combination between small roles (watermelon + cherry) is won and a small winning symbol (Bell 1 symbol, Bell 2 symbol, watermelon symbol, cherry symbol) is arranged.

  Then, when the determination in step S701 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, the fifth service game start flag is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S715, and a service game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S701 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S705, where it is determined whether the bell 2 symbols are aligned. That is, when it is determined in the above-described step S350 that the small role symbols are prepared, it is determined whether or not the small role symbol is the bell 2 symbol ("M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol"). If the bell 2 symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S707.

  In step S707, it is determined whether the normal game flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the normal game. If the determination in step S707 is not satisfied, it is determined in step S709 whether the third service game flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the third service game. If the determination in step S709 is not satisfied, it is determined in step S711 whether the fourth service game flag is ON (= 1). That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is controlled by the fourth service game. If the determination in step S711 is not satisfied, that is, if the gaming state is not any of the base game, the third service game, and the fourth service game, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination is satisfied in any of steps S707, S709, and S711, that is, if the gaming state is controlled to one of the base game, the third service game, and the fourth service game, the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, the second service game start flag is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S715, and a service game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

[Service game start processing]
The service game start process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This service game start process is executed in steps S376 and S386 in the determination process in FIG. 61, step S615 in the ST demotion determination process in FIG. 66, and step S715 in the ST promotion determination process in FIG. It is assumed that the service game start process is executed in the same manner in any of steps S376, S386, S615, and S715.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the first service game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, the number of first service games is set to “250” in step S803. In the next step S805, the first service game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the first service game start flag is set to OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the first service game is started from the next game.

  If the determination in step S801 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S807 to determine whether the second service game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, the number of second service games is set to “50” in step S809. In the next step S811, the second service game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the second service game start flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the second service game is started from the next game.

  If the determination in step S807 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S813 to determine whether the third service game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, the number of third service games is set to “50” in step S815. In the next step S817, the third service game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the third service game start flag is set to OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the third service game is started from the next game.

  If the determination in step S813 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S819 to determine whether the fourth service game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, the number of fourth service games is set to “6000” in step S821. In the next step S821, the fourth service game in-progress flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the fourth service game start flag is set to OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the fourth service game is started from the next game.

  If the determination in step S819 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S825, and it is determined whether the fifth service game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, in the next step S827, the fifth service game in-progress flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, at this time, the fifth service game start flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the fifth service game is started from the next game. For the fifth service game, unlike the other service games, the fifth service game number is not set. Therefore, as long as the bonus flag (BB flag, RB flag) is carried over internally, the fifth service game is continuously executed regardless of the number of service games.

  If none of the determinations in steps S801, S807, S813, S819, and S825 is satisfied, the process ends without performing any process.

[Service game end determination processing]
Next, the service game end determination process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the determination process of FIG. 61 described above, when neither determination of steps S301 and S303 is satisfied, this service game end determination process is executed.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether the first service game flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S901 is satisfied, in the next step S903, the number of first service games is subtracted by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S905, it is determined whether the remaining number of first service games is “0”. If the number of first service games is “0”, the determination in S905 is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S909, and the first service game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the first service game ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S905 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S907, and it is determined whether one of the BB flag and the RB flag (that is, the bonus flag) is ON (= 1). The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to a case where either BB or RB is won in the first service game.

  Then, when the determination in step S907 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S909, and the first service game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the first service game ends. The processing here indicates that the first service game is ended by winning either BB or RB (ie, bonus).

  If the determinations in steps S905 and S907 are not satisfied, the end condition for the first service game is not satisfied, so the process ends and the first service game is continuously executed.

  Next, when the determination in step S901 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S911, and it is determined whether the second service game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S911 is satisfied, in the next step S913, the second service game number is subtracted by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S915.

  In step S915, it is determined whether the remaining number of second service games is “0”. If the second service game number is “0”, the determination in S915 is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S919, and the second service game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the second service game ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S915 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S917, and it is determined whether one of the BB flag and the RB flag (that is, the bonus flag) is ON (= 1). The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to a case where either BB or RB is won in the second service game.

  When the determination in step S917 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S919, and the second service game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the second service game ends. The process here indicates that the second service game is ended by winning either BB or RB (ie, bonus).

  Note that if the determinations in steps S915 and S917 are not satisfied, the second service game end condition is not satisfied, and thus the present process ends and the second service game is continuously executed.

  Next, when the determination in step S911 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S921, and it is determined whether the third service game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S921 is satisfied, in the next step S923, the third service game number is subtracted by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S925.

  In step S925, it is determined whether the remaining number of times of the third service game is “0”. If the third service game number is “0”, the determination in S925 is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S931, and the third service game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the third service game ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S925 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S927, and it is determined whether one of the BB flag and the RB flag (that is, the bonus flag) is ON (= 1). The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to a case where either BB or RB is won in the third service game.

  If the determination in step S927 is satisfied, the process moves to step S931, and the third service game flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the third service game ends. The processing here indicates that the third service game is ended by winning either BB or RB (ie, bonus).

  Further, if the determination in step S927 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S929, and it is determined whether either the bell 2 symbol or the service combination 2 symbol is available. When this determination is satisfied, in the third service game, either the bell 2 or the service combination 2 is won, and either the bell 2 symbol or the service combination 2 symbol is arranged in the symbol display window 14. Cases apply.

  Then, when the determination in step S929 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S931, and the third service game flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the third service game ends. The process here ends when the third service game transitions to another service game state (promotion to ST2 or demote to ST1) because the bell 2 symbol and the service role 2 symbol are ready. Show.

  Note that if the determinations in steps S925, S927, and S929 are not satisfied, the termination condition for the third service game is not satisfied, so this process ends and the third service game is continuously executed. The

  Next, when the determination in step S921 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S933, and it is determined whether the fourth service game in-progress flag is ON (= 1). If the determination in step S933 is satisfied, in the next step S935, the fourth service game number is subtracted by “1”, and the flow proceeds to step S937.

  In step S937, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of fourth service games is “0”. If the number of times of the fourth service game is “0”, the determination in S937 is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S943, and the fourth service game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the fourth service game ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S937 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S939, and it is determined whether one of the BB flag and the RB flag (that is, the bonus flag) is ON (= 1). The case where this determination is satisfied corresponds to a case where either BB or RB is won in the fourth service game.

  If the determination in step S939 is satisfied, the process moves to step S943, and the fourth service game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the fourth service game ends. The process here indicates that the fourth service game is ended by winning either BB or RB (ie, bonus).

  Further, if the determination in step S939 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S941, and it is determined whether either the bell 2 symbol or the service combination 2 symbol is present. When this determination is satisfied, in the fourth service game, either the bell 2 or the service combination 2 is won, and either the bell 2 symbol or the service combination 2 symbol is arranged in the symbol display window 14. Cases apply.

  When the determination in step S941 is satisfied, the process moves to step S943, and the fourth service game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the fourth service game ends. In this process, the game state transitions to another service state (service game) (promotion to ST2 or demote to ST1) due to the fact that the bell 2 symbol and the service combination 2 symbol are ready, and the fourth service game Indicates the end.

  If the determinations in steps S937, S939, and S941 are not satisfied, the end condition of the fourth service game is not satisfied, and therefore the present process ends and the fourth service game is continuously executed. The

  Next, when the determination in step S933 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S945, and it is determined whether the fifth service game flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S945 is satisfied, in next step S947, it is determined whether any of the BB symbol and the RB symbol (that is, the bonus symbol) is available. When this determination is satisfied, one of the BB symbol and the RB symbol is displayed on the symbol display window 14 based on the bonus flag (BB flag, RB flag) carried over internally in the fifth service game. This is the case when

  When the determination in step S947 is satisfied, the process moves to step S949, and the fifth service game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the fifth service game ends. The processing here is that the game state is shifted to the bonus game (BB game, RB game) and the fifth service game is ended when the BB symbol and the RB symbol are aligned by the player's aspiration and the like. Show.

  If none of the determinations in steps S901, S911, S921, S933, and S945 is satisfied, the process ends without performing any process. Specifically, when the gaming state is controlled by the normal game, the normal game flag is ON (= 1) and the first to fifth service game flags are OFF (= 0). None of the determinations of the above steps S901, S911, S921, S933, and S945 are satisfied, and the process is terminated and the normal game is continued.

[Game ball capture processing]
Next, the flow of the game ball taking process will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process related to the control of the game ball capturing device 19. FIG. 71 to FIG. 73 are flowcharts showing a game ball taking process executed in the game ball taking device 19. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a checkout process executed in the game ball take-in device 19.

The variables will be explained in advance to help understanding. 1-step time counter: A variable that determines the pulse width of the stepping motor excitation. The initial value is assigned as the number of interrupt cycles, and is decremented at each timer interrupt.
Number of acquisition commands: Commanded number of acquisitions.
Target number of captures: The initial value is the number of capture commands, and is decremented each time a captured game ball is detected.
Index detection flag: Turned on when the angle detection photo switch 64 detects the slit 63a.
Index count number: The initial value is the number of fetch commands, and is decremented each time the index detection flag is turned ON.
There are three types of capture operation modes: A, B, and C. When it is determined that there is a ball pressure above a certain level, mode A, when it is determined that there is no ball pressure above a certain level, mode B, retry operation When necessary, the mode is switched to mode C.

  In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 70 is started every 1.5 msec. The main processing in the timer interrupt processing includes reading of sensors, and processing for outputting excitation (driving) pulses of a stepping motor that is a driving motor of the game ball capturing device 19.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the timer interrupt process, first, the one-step time counter is decremented in step S1102 with the start of this interrupt process. At this time, the value of the original one-step time counter does not matter. Next, it is determined whether or not a count switch is detected (step S1104). This count switch shows both the back take-in count switch 57 and the front take-in count switch 58 (see FIG. 11). If the count switch is detected in step S1104, the target number of captures is decremented in the next step S1106. If no count switch is detected in step S1104, the process skips step S1106 and proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, it is determined whether there is an index detected. Here, the detection of the index means that the angle detection photo switch 64 detects the slit 63 a of the angle detection plate 63. When the index is detected, the game ball carrier 54 is at a discharge position where the game ball is dropped. If index detection is confirmed in step S1108, the index detection flag is turned on in next step S1110. When the index detection cannot be confirmed in step S1108, the process of step S1110 is skipped.

  Thereafter, excitation processing is performed in step S1112. This is a process of outputting / stopping pulses for forward / reverse / stop of the stepping motor that is the drive source of the game ball take-in device 19. Since details of this process may be performed using a known technique, description thereof is omitted. When the process of step S1112 is completed, the process returns from the timer interrupt process to the normal process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71 to FIG. 73, a description will be given of a game ball take-in process that is executed when called in the flow of game control. As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, in the game ball take-in process, first, in step S1201, it is confirmed whether or not the ball removal operation is turned on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ball removal valve detector 56 has detected the movement of the ball removal valve 55. When the player operates the ball removal knob 11, the ball removal valve 55 moves, and the ball removal valve detector 56 is set to ON. When the ball removal valve detector 56 is ON (Yes in step S1201), the process proceeds to a settlement process described later (step S1300). When the checkout process in step S1300 is completed, the process returns to step S1201 again.

  On the other hand, if the ball removal operation is not turned on (No in step S1201), it is determined whether or not the bet button is turned on in step S1202. If the bet button is not turned on (No in step S1202), the process loops until the bet button is turned on or the ball removal operation is turned on. When the bet button is turned on (Yes in step S1202), the process proceeds to step S1203, and the notification of waiting for retry (described later) is terminated. Next, the process proceeds to step S1204, and the number of fetch commands determined by the bet button is substituted for the target number of fetches. Similarly, in the next step S1206, the fetch command number is substituted for the index count number.

  In step S1208, the retry count is cleared. Here, the number of retries is the number of times that a retry operation is performed when there is a missing game ball ingestion. It is determined that the bet button is operated again (details will be described later). Next, in step S1210, it is confirmed whether or not the ball pressure detection switch is ON. Here, the ball pressure detection switch means the back proximity switch 59 and the front proximity switch 60 in FIG. 11, and is set to ON when the game ball is filled up to both positions of the back proximity switch 59 and the front proximity switch 60. Is done. In the present embodiment, if the game ball is filled up to the position of the rear proximity switch 59 and the front proximity switch 60, it is determined that a certain or higher ball pressure is secured. If the ball pressure detection switch is ON (Yes in step S1210), the process proceeds to step S1212.

  In this embodiment, if the ball pressure detection switch is ON at the start of the acquisition operation, the acquisition operation mode is set to A, and if the ball pressure detection switch is OFF, the acquisition operation mode is set to B. When the game ball is lost in the capture operation and the retry operation is performed, the capture operation mode is set to C and the operation is performed. In the capture operation mode A, the drive motor is initially rotated at a medium speed, and thereafter, the capture operation is performed by switching the rotation speed and rotating the drive motor at a high speed. In the capture operation mode B, the capture operation is performed by rotating the drive motor at a medium speed from the beginning to the end. The capture operation mode C is for retry operation, and performs the capture operation by rotating the drive motor at a low speed. In the take-in operation mode A, since the take-in operation is performed by first rotating the drive motor at a medium speed and then rotating the drive motor at a high speed, the initial speed of the game ball is insufficient at the start of the take-in operation. In addition, there is an advantage that the taking-in operation can be sufficiently performed and that the taking-in operation can be performed at a high speed in accordance with the acceleration of the game ball, so that the total taking-in speed can be secured. In other words, both the prevention of missing game balls and the high-speed taking-in operation are achieved.

  If it is confirmed that the ball pressure detection switch is ON (Yes in step S1210), A is set as the capture operation mode in step S1212. Thereafter, in step S1214, 0 is set in the one-step time counter. Here, 0 is set in order to change the one-step time counter, that is, the rotation speed in accordance with the step number time switching counter after step S1228 described later. In the next step S1216, the step number time switching counter is initialized to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1224.

  On the other hand, if the ball pressure detection switch is not ON (No in step S1210), B is set as the take-in operation mode in step S1218. Thereafter, the medium speed is set in the one-step time counter in step S1220. Specifically, the value of how many interrupts the pulse width of one step of the stepping motor is assigned to the one-step time counter (for example, high speed = 3, medium speed = 6, low speed = 9) To help understanding, we use the words high speed, medium speed, and low speed. Next, in step S1222, the step number time switching counter is initialized to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1224 (in this embodiment, the step number time switching counter is referred to only when the capture operation mode is A, so step S1222 is performed. There is no problem even if there is no).

  In step S1224, it is checked whether the target number of captures is zero. Here, if the target number of captures is 0, the capture is complete (Yes in step S1224), and the game ball capture process is terminated. This target number of acquisitions is decremented every time the count switch is detected in step S1106 of the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1224, if the target number of captures is not 0 (No in step S1224), the process proceeds to next step S1226.

  In step S1226, it is confirmed whether or not the one-step time counter is 0 or less. The fact that the one-step time counter is 0 means that the interruption for the pulse width of one step of the stepping motor has been completed. While the one-step time counter is a positive value, a loop is performed between step S1224 and step S1226. That is, it waits for the time for one step to elapse. If 0 is set in the one-step time counter in the above-described step S1214, no loop is performed between step S1224 and step S1226, and control is transferred to the next step S1228.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the one-step time counter is 0 or less (No in step S1226), control is transferred to step S1228, and the capture operation mode is determined. In step S1228, it is determined whether the capture operation mode is A or not. If the capture operation mode is A (Yes in step S1228), the process proceeds to step S1230. When the take-in operation mode is not A (No in step S1228), the process proceeds to step S1236, and it is determined whether or not the take-in operation mode is B. If the capture operation mode is B (Yes in step S1236), the process proceeds to step S1238. When the capture operation mode is not B (No in step S1236), the process proceeds to step S1240. Here, the process proceeds to step S1240 only when the capture operation mode is C.

  In step S1240, the one-step time counter is set to a low speed, and the process proceeds to step S1242. In step S1238, which is processed when the capture operation mode is B, the one-step time counter is set to medium speed, and the process proceeds to step S1242.

  If it is determined that the capture operation mode is A (Yes in step S1228), control is transferred to step S1230, and the step number time switching counter is incremented. Next, the process proceeds to step S1232, and it is determined whether or not the value of the step number time switching counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined count. If the specified count has not been reached (No in step S1232), the process proceeds to step S1238, the one-step time counter is set to medium speed, and the process proceeds to step S1242. If it is determined that the value of the step number time switching counter is equal to or greater than the regulation count (Yes in step S1232), the process proceeds to step S1234 to set the one step time counter at a high speed, and the process proceeds to step S1242. That is, in this portion, when the step number time switching counter is less than the regulation count, the one step time counter is set to a medium speed, and as a result, the drive motor rotates at a medium speed. When the step number time switching counter is equal to or greater than the regulation count, the one step time counter is set at high speed, and as a result, the drive motor rotates at high speed.

  Next, in step S1242, it is determined whether or not the index detection flag is turned on as a result of the index detection performed in the timer interrupt process described above. If the index detection flag has not been turned on (No in step S1242), it means that no index has been detected in one step of the stepping motor, and in step S1244, the index non-detection counter is incremented. In step S1246, it is determined whether the index non-detection counter has reached a specified value. Here, the specified value is selected to have a margin (several steps) than the number of steps between indexes (that is, the number of steps of one rotation of the stepping motor divided by the number of indexes per rotation). If the index non-detection counter has reached the specified value (Yes in step S1246), there is a possibility that a ball smear has occurred, so a ball smear process is performed in step S1248. The ball biting process is a known technique, and is performed by operating the stepping motor in steps of normal rotation → reverse rotation → normal rotation. When the ball scratch process in step S1248 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1264. Also, when the index non-detection counter has not reached the specified value (No in step S1246), the process proceeds to step S1264.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S1242 that the index detection flag has been turned on (Yes in step S1242), first the index detection flag is cleared in preparation for the next detection in step S1250, and the index non-detection counter in step S1252. Also clear. In step S1254, the index count is decremented.

  Next, it is checked in step S1256 whether the ball removal operation is ON. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the ball removal valve detector 56 has detected the movement of the ball removal valve 55. When the player operates the ball removal knob 11, the ball removal valve 55 moves and the ball removal valve detector 56 is set to ON. When the ball removal valve detector 56 is ON, since the ball removal operation is ON (Yes in step S1256), the process proceeds to a settlement process in step S1300 (described later). If the ball removal valve detector 56 is not ON, the ball removal operation is not ON (No in step S1256), and the process proceeds to the next step S1258.

  In step S1258, it is determined whether the index count is 0 or not. If the index count number is 0, the number of indexes corresponding to the number of take-in commands has been detected. Therefore, if the index count is normal, game balls should have been taken in as many times as the number of take-in commands. Therefore, if the index count number is 0 (Yes in step S1258), the process proceeds to step S1260, and a sphere detection time wait is performed. This wait time is a little time added to the time that the game ball will be detected by falling to the back take-in count switch 57 and the front take-in count switch 58 (see FIG. 11).

  When the ball detection time is weighted in step S1260, it is determined in step S1262 whether the target number of captures is zero. If the target number of captures is 0, the current capture operation is completed, and the process returns to exit the present game ball capture process (Yes in step S1262). If the target number of captures is not 0 (No in step S1262), a missing game ball has occurred, and the process moves to a retry operation after step S1266.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1258 that the index count is not 0 (No in step S1258), since the capturing operation is in progress, excitation in the next step of the stepping motor is performed in step S1264. Update the excitation pattern to output a pulse. The same applies to the case of No in step S1246 immediately after the processing in step S1248 is completed. The excitation pattern updated here is referred to in the excitation output process (step S1112) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 70) described above. After the excitation pattern is updated in step S1264, the process proceeds to the next step. Therefore, the process moves to step S1224 again and waits for one step. The following is the same as described above.

  In the case of No in step S1262, the number of game balls corresponding to the number of acquisition commands is not detected even though the number of indexes corresponding to the number of acquisition commands is detected. It means that it has occurred. After step S1266, retry processing is performed when a loss occurs.

  In step S1266, the number of retries is incremented. The number of retries is cleared and initialized in step S1208 as an initial setting of the game ball capturing process. Next, since the current target number of captures is an insufficient number of game balls, the target number of captures is substituted as a new index count number (step S1268). Next, since a retry operation is performed, the one-step time counter is set to a low speed in step S1270. The capture operation mode is set to C (step S1272).

  In step S1274, it is determined whether the number of retries has reached a specified value. The specified number of retries is the upper limit number of retries. If the number of retries has not reached the specified value (No in step S1274), the process returns to step S1224 to resume the capture operation at a low speed, and waits for one step. The following is the same as described above.

  If the number of retries has reached the specified value (Yes in step S1274), the waiting for retry is notified by lighting a lamp (not shown) waiting for retry (step S1276). Then, the process proceeds to next Step S1278. In step S1278, since the current target number of captures is a shortage of game balls, the target number of captures is substituted as a new capture command number, and the process proceeds to step S1201, which is the first process of the present game ball capture process. The process waits until the ball removal operation or the bet button is operated. The player can select whether to finish the game by performing a ball removal operation here, or to replenish the game ball and press the bet button again to continue the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of a settlement process that is executed when the player performs a ball removal operation in the game ball take-in process. As shown in FIG. 74, in the settlement process, first, an excitation stop is instructed (step S1302), and the drive motor of the game ball take-in device is stopped. Thereafter, in step S1304, it is confirmed whether or not the ball removal operation is turned off. Specifically, it is checked whether the ball removal valve detector 56 has detected the return of the ball removal valve 55 that has been moved. When the player releases his hand from the ball removal knob 11, the ball removal valve 55 is advanced by the force that the coil spring 61 tries to return to the original state, and the ball removal valve detector 56 is set to OFF (see FIG. 11). As long as this ball removal operation is OFF (No in step S304), step S1304 is looped to wait for the player's completion of the ball removal operation.

  If the ball removal operation is turned ON in step S1304 (Yes in step S1304), it is checked in step S1306 whether the ball pressure detection switch is ON. Here, the ball pressure detection switch means the back proximity switch 59 and the front proximity switch 60 in FIG. 11, and is turned on when the game ball is filled up to both positions of the back proximity switch 59 and the front proximity switch 60. Judge that In the present embodiment, if the game ball is filled up to the position of the rear proximity switch 59 and the front proximity switch 60, it is determined that a certain or higher ball pressure is secured. Here, the fact that the ball pressure detection switch is ON means that there is a corresponding residual ball in the take-in device. That is, in this case, it is determined that the player has an intention to continue the game, and the player simply wants to reduce the number of game balls in the storage tray 20 (Yes in step S1306), and the settlement process is directly exited.

  On the other hand, if the ball pressure detection switch is not ON in step S1306 (No in step S1306), it is next determined in step S1308 whether there is a game ball already taken in. The captured game ball is a game ball detected by the count switch (the back capture count switch 57 or the front capture count switch 58). If there is a captured game ball, There are game balls that have already been taken in by the number obtained by subtracting the target number from the number of commands to be loaded. If there is a game ball already taken in (Yes in step S1308), in step S1310, a payout command is output to pay out the number of game balls already taken in from the game ball payout device 18. If there is no game ball already taken in (No in step S1308), then 0.5 seconds is set as the specified time in step S1314. If a payout command for paying out the number of game balls that have been taken in is output in step S1310, 6 seconds is set as the specified time in step S1312.

  Next, in step S1316, the process waits for the specified time set in the previous step. This waiting time is the time required for the game balls that are paid out to roll in the game ball path from the storage tray 20 to the game ball take-in device 19 when the game balls are paid out from the game ball payout device 18. It is. As described above, when the game ball is returned through the game ball payout device 18, the game ball take-in device 19 operates in consideration of the rolling time of the game ball, so that there is no return omission to the player.

  In step S1318, the excitation pattern is changed to the reverse direction (that is, the return direction). Thereby, in the above-described timer interruption process (see FIG. 70), the excitation output process (step S1112) reverses the drive motor. If the reverse of the excitation pattern is instructed in step S1318, it is confirmed in step S1320 whether the specified rotational speed has been rotated. Here, the number of revolutions of the regulation can only be returned by adding the game balls remaining in the game ball take-in device 19 and the number of game balls that have already been taken-in to be paid out and returned. Good. However, in the case of this embodiment, the game ball take-in device 19 handles two rows of game balls, but there is a possibility that the game balls to be returned are shifted to one row. Therefore, it is desirable to set the number of regulations twice the above calculation.

  While the regulation rotational speed determination in step S1320 is not satisfied (No in step S1320), the process returns to step S1318. Then, when this rule rotational speed determination is satisfied (Yes in step S1320), the process returns as the completion of the settlement process.

  In any case, when this settlement process is completed, the process proceeds to the first process (step S1201) of the above-described game ball take-in process (see FIGS. 71 to 73), and the ball removal operation or the bet button is Wait for operation. The player can now choose to continue the game by refilling the game balls and pressing the bet button again.

[Conditions for transitioning to each service game / Termination conditions]
The game process executed in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Here, regarding the transition control of the gaming state executed based on the above-described game processing, the transition condition to each service game and the end condition of each service game will be described. As described above, the service games include the first service game, the second service game, the third service game, the fourth service game, and the fifth service game. Then, unless the base game or the bonus game (BB, RB) is in progress, any one of the first service game to the fifth service game is performed.

  The transition condition to the first service game is that the service combination 2 is won in the normal state (the service combination 2 must be available), or the service combination 2 is performed when the third service game is being performed. To win (to have two service roles). In addition, the end condition of the first service game is that 250 games are played in the first service game, or that BB or RB is won (the BB symbol or RB symbol does not need to be prepared, and the BB or RB It suffices if the flag is ON). In this first service game, after 250 games are played without winning either BB or RB, the normal state is set.

  The transition condition to the second service game is that the player is elected to win the bell 2 in the normal state (being the bell 2 symbols), or the bell is played when the third service game or the fourth service game is played. 2 (winning the bell 2 design). Also, the end condition of the second service game is that 50 games are played in the second service game, or that BB or RB is won (the BB symbol or RB symbol does not need to be prepared, and BB or RB It suffices if the flag is ON). In this second service game, after 50 games are played without winning either BB or RB, the normal state is entered.

  The transition condition to the third service game is that the BB game ends. That is, as described above, after the BB game is ended, the process always shifts to the third service game. The end condition of the third service game is that 50 games are played in the third service game, the transition condition to the first service game is established (winning the service role 2), and the second service game. (The winning of the bell 2) and the winning of the BB or RB (there is no need for the BB symbol or RB symbol, and the BB or RB flag may be turned ON). In this third service game, 50 games were played without winning either BB or RB, and without satisfying any of the conditions for transition to the first service game and the conditions for transition to the second service game. After that, it becomes a normal state.

  The transition condition to the fourth service game is that the RB game ends. That is, as described above, after the RB game is finished, the process always shifts to the fourth service game. The end condition of the fourth service game is that 6000 games are played in the fourth service game, the transition condition to the first service game is satisfied (winning the service role 2), and the second service game. (The winning of the bell 2) and the winning of the BB or RB (there is no need for the BB symbol or RB symbol, and the BB or RB flag may be turned ON). In this fourth service game, 6000 games were played without winning either BB or RB, and without satisfying the conditions for transition to the first service game and the conditions for transition to the second service game. After that, it becomes a normal state.

  Regardless of whether the transition to the fifth service game is in the normal state, any service game from the first service game to the fourth service game is performed when the service game is being performed. Regardless of whether or not he / she is winning BB or RB (there is no need to have BB symbols or RB symbols, and the BB or RB flag only has to be ON). Also, the ending condition for the fifth service game is to win BB or RB (the BB symbol or RB symbol does not have to be aligned, and the BB or RB flag only has to be turned ON). That is, the 5th service game is a privilege given after winning BB or RB (after BB flag or RB flag turns ON) until BB symbol or RB symbol is prepared.

  However, when the service combination 2 symbols are aligned and shifted to the first service game, even if the bell 2 symbols are aligned in the first service game, the transition to the second service game is not performed. Similarly, when the bell 2 symbols are aligned and a transition is made to the second service game, even if the service combination 2 is aligned in the second service game, the transition to the first service game is not made.

[Each service game / normal game]
Next, each service game and the base game will be described. However, since the fourth service game is performed after the RB game is ended and the third service game is performed after the BB game is ended, the fourth service game and the third service game are described for convenience of explaining the flow of the game. The base game, the first service game, the second service game, and the fifth service game will be described in this order.

[Fourth service game]
As described above, the fourth service game is played after the end of the RB game.

  In the fourth service game, the winning probability of service combination 2 is approximately 1/32 and the winning probability of Bell 2 is approximately 1/32. That is, the probability of shifting to the second service game is equal to the probability of shifting to the first service game.

  In the fourth service game, the winning probability of service combination 1 is approximately 1/8, and the winning probability of bell 1 is approximately 1/6. However, since winning the service combination 1 is not a condition for ending the fourth service game (that is, no transition is made to another service game), even if the service combination 1 is won, the fourth service game is continued. Similarly, winning for Bell 1 is not a condition for ending the fourth service game, so that even if Bell 1 is won, the fourth service game is continued.

  In addition, when the bell 1 or the bell 2 is won and the bell 1 symbol or the bell 2 symbol is aligned on the effective line, the effect display device 15 reminds the mere bell without distinguishing the bell 1 and the bell 2. A picture is displayed. Thereby, it is difficult to grasp from the display of the effect display device 15 which of the bells 1 and 2 is won. Also, no matter which of the bells 1 and 2 is won, the number of prize balls paid out is the same as 25, so which of the bells 1 and 2 is won? Also, it is not possible to grasp from the number of prize balls paid out. As a result, when the player wins the bell when the fourth service game is being played, the player has a sense of expectation that the player may move to the second service game. In addition, when winning the bell 1 or the bell 2, it is difficult to grasp which of the bell 1 and the bell 2 is won, so the player is a bell that shifts to the second service game. It is also interesting to predict whether or not.

  Similarly, when the service combination 1 or service combination 2 is won and the service combination 1 or service combination 2 symbols are aligned on the active line, the effect display device 15 includes the service combination 1 and the service combination 2. A pattern reminiscent of a simple service role is displayed without distinction. As a result, it is difficult to grasp from the display of the effect display device 15 which of the service combination 1 and the service combination 2 is won. Furthermore, since the service game can be executed even if any of the service combination 1 and service combination 2 is won, either service combination of service combination 1 or service combination 2 is selected. It has become more difficult to understand whether or not As a result, when the service combination is won while the fourth service game is being played, the player has a desire not to move to the first service game. In addition, when winning service combination 1 or service combination 2, it is difficult to determine which service combination of service combination 1 or service combination 2 is won, so the player can enter the first service game. It is also interesting to predict whether or not it is a service role to be transferred.

  By the way, the combined probability of the service combination 1 and the service combination 2 is approximately 1 / 1.7, and the combined probability of the bell 1 and the bell 2 is approximately 1/5. In other words, in the fourth service game, although the winning probability of the service role 2 is equal to the winning probability of the bell 2, the transition probability to the first service game is equal to the transition probability to the second service game. The frequency with which service role symbols are aligned on the effective line is approximately three times the frequency with which the bell symbols are aligned on the effective line.

  In the present embodiment, the service role probability of the fourth service game is more advantageous to the advantage than the normal game, and is the second highest among the plurality of service games after the second service game. In other words, it is difficult for the fourth service game to win the game after the second service game, and among the plurality of service games, the rate of decrease in the number of possessed balls is the second lowest after the second service game.

  It should be noted that if 6000 games are played without winning either service combination 2 or bell 2, the normal state is reached, but it is extremely rare that 6000 games are played without winning either service combination 2 or bell 2. .

  As described above, after the RB game is over, the fourth service game is performed in which the decrease in the number of game balls held by the player is greatly suppressed. It is possible to shift to the second service game that is advantageous to the player or the first service game that is disadvantageous to the player than the fourth service game. Therefore, there is no need to simply wait for the end of the fourth service game (simply digest the predetermined game), the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the fourth service game, unless the service combination 2 is won and the first service game is transferred, the second service game is won and the bonus service (RB or BB) is selected. The bonus game will be continued until one of them is met. That is, the fourth service game is an advantageous state in which, unless the service combination 2 is won, the player can expect to be promoted to the second service game or won the bonus without reducing the number of balls. Inevitably, the fun of gaming will improve.

  By the way, in general, a player is pleased to win BB, but if he wins RB, he is disappointed because the winning type is not BB even though he has won the lottery (RB game wins more than BB game) I am disappointed because there are few prize balls I can do). However, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bonus winning probability is made advantageous (approximately 1/100) to the player by making the winning probability of BB extremely lower than the winning probability of RB, and the game starts. In addition to being able to win bonuses (especially RB) at a relatively early stage, it is possible to gradually win the player's ball by continuously winning RB, and as much as possible to discourage the player. It is not given. Moreover, when the RB is won, a fourth service game that is advantageous to the player will be performed thereafter, so even if the RB is won, the disappointment given to the player will be negligible and rather will not reduce the holding ball. Interest can be improved by expecting the next bonus. Further, since the winning combination cannot be grasped until all the reels are stopped, the player cannot be distracted until the end of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the conventional ball throwing and spinning machine, a picture reminding the winning combination is attached to each reel band as a pattern corresponding to the winning combination so that the winning combination can be understood at a glance. For example, symbols such as replay, bell, or watermelon were drawn on each reel band. In other words, if, for example, bells are aligned on the effective line when all reels are stopped, it can be determined that the bell has been won.

  On the other hand, in the ball throwing spinning machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbols attached to the reel bands 381a, 381b, 381c are not pictures that evoke the winning combination alone. In other words, the winning combination cannot be grasped only by stopping one reel or two reels, and the winning combination can be grasped only when all reels are stopped.

  As described above, when the service combination 1 is won, the symbol combination mode on the active line when all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 13 are stopped is “H male symbol-I”. "Male design-H male design".

  When the service combination 2 is won, the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line when all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 13 are stopped is “H male symbol-T child symbol— "H male design".

  In addition, when the symbol 1 is won, all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 13 are stopped. The symbol combination on the active line is “M child symbol-T child symbol-M child”. "Design".

  Further, when winning the bell 2, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 13 are stopped, the combination of symbols on the active line is "M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol". "

  Therefore, when the player first operates, for example, the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 and the "I male symbol" stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the service combination 1 or the bell 2 is won. There is a possibility. When the fourth service game is being played, if the winning combination is the service combination 1, the fourth service game is continuously performed without shifting to another service game, while the winning combination is the bell 2 The player shifts to a second service game that is advantageous to the player in that the number of game balls held by the player increases.

  Further, when the “T child symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b by the player first operating the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10, for example, the service combination 2 or the bell 1 is won. There is a possibility. When the fourth service game is being played, if the winning combination is Bell 1, the fourth service game is continuously performed without shifting to another service game, while if the winning combination is service combination 2 The player shifts to the first service game, which is disadvantageous to the player in that the game balls held by the player are rapidly reduced. The first service game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or a service game more advantageous than the first service game unless 250 games are played or BB or RB is won. .

  As described above, when the player operates the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 for the first time when the fourth service game is being performed, the game is played depending on the symbol stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. One will be angry. Specifically, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 and the "I male symbol" stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the game proceeds to the second service game. While having a sense of expectation, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the first service game as a trigger, and the user is relieved. Further, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 and the “T child symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the game is used as a trigger for the second service game. Since it is determined that the game will not be transferred, there is still a possibility of moving to the first service game, so it is desired that the user not move to the first service game. That is, the symbol “I male symbol” drawn on the middle reel 301b functions as a safe symbol that may be transferred to the second service game but not transferred to the first service game. The drawn symbol “T child symbol” functions as an out symbol that may shift to the first service game despite the possibility of shifting to the second service game. Further, since the winning combination cannot be grasped until all the reels are stopped, the player cannot be distracted until the end of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, “H” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “male symbol” stops, there is a possibility that the service combination 1 or the service combination 2 is won. When the fourth service game is being played, if the winning combination is service combination 1, the fourth service game is continuously performed without shifting to another service game, while the winning combination is service combination 2. For example, the game service shifts to the first service game, which is disadvantageous for the player in that the game balls held by the player are rapidly reduced. The first service game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or a service game more advantageous than the first service game unless 250 games are played or BB or RB is won. .

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, “M” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “child symbol” stops, there is a possibility that the bell 1 or the bell 2 is won. When the fourth service game is being played, if the winning combination is Bell 1, the fourth service game is continuously performed without shifting to another service game, while if the winning combination is Bell 2, The game shifts to a second service game that is advantageous to the player in that the number of game balls held by the player increases.

  As described above, even when the player operates the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 first and then operates the right reel stop button 10c when the fourth service game is being performed. Depending on the symbols stopped on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line, the player will be relieved. Specifically, the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10, and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, so that the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “H male symbol” is stopped at the same time, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the second service game, but there is still a possibility to shift to the first service game. I hope you don't. That is, the “H male symbol” drawn on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line may shift to the first service game even though there is no possibility of shifting to the second service game. The symbol “M child symbol”, which functions as an out symbol and is drawn on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line, shifts to the first service game although it may shift to the second service game. It functions as a safe design that never happens. In addition, although the winning combination can be grasped when the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped, it cannot be grasped until all reels are stopped as to whether or not to shift to another service game. Until the end of the game, the player cannot be discouraged and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the fourth service game is being performed, when the player first operates, for example, the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10, and among the reel stop buttons 10 For example, when the left reel stop button 10a is first operated and then the right reel stop button 10c is operated, in any case, every time each reel stop button 10a, 10b, 10c is operated, expectation and disappointment. A sense of inconvenience is mixed, and an innovative gaming machine that has never existed can be provided.

  It should be noted that when the service combination 2 is won in the fourth service game, the first service game is almost always transferred, but the first service game is not always transferred. As can be seen from FIG. 59 (a), when the extracted random number value is 13017, service combination 2 and BB are selected in duplicate, and when the extracted random value is 13136, service combination 2 and RB are selected. Duplicate and won.

  As described above, when winning service combination 2 in the fourth service game is one of the conditions for shifting to the first service game, when winning service combination 2 in the fourth service game, BB or RB may be won together with service combination 2 (at this time, the game does not shift to the first service game). Thereby, even when the service combination 2 is won in the fourth service game, the BB game or the RB game may be played rarely without shifting to the first service game. Therefore, when the service combination 2 is won in the fourth service game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by giving the player a slight sense of expectation of winning the BB or RB.

  Similarly, although the transition to the second service game is almost always made when winning the bell 2 in the fourth service game, the transition to the second service game is not always performed. As can be seen from FIG. 59 (a), when the extracted random number value is 13015, Bell 2 and BB are selected in duplicate and the extracted random number value is any one of 13115 to 13134. Will win both Bell 2 and RB.

  As described above, when winning the bell 2 in the fourth service game is one of the conditions for shifting to the second service game, when the bell 2 is won in the fourth service game, the bell 2 And BB or RB may be won together (in this case, the game does not shift to the second service game). Thereby, even if it is a case where bell 2 is won in the 4th service game, a BB game or an RB game may be performed rarely, without shifting to the 2nd service game. Here, in the BB game and the RB game, more prize balls can be obtained in a shorter period than in the case where the second service game is played, so even if the player wins the bell 2 in the fourth service game, the player is disappointed. Rather, a BB game or RB game that is more advantageous to the player than the second service game is played. Thereby, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

[Third service game]
As described above, the third service game is played after the end of the BB game.

  In this third service game, the probability of winning alone for service combination 2 is zero (there is a possibility of winning in duplicate with BB or RB), and the winning probability of Bell 2 is approximately 1/32. Therefore, since there is no probability of shifting to the first service game, the player has a sense of expectation of shifting to the second service game. In particular, in the third service game, there is no probability of shifting to the first service game despite the fact that the player can play a game while substantially maintaining the amount of game balls held by the player, and the second service game. Since the game can be shifted to only the game, the player plays the game with the expectation of further stepping up to the second service game, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this third service game, the winning probability of service combination 1 is approximately one third, and the winning probability of bell 1 is approximately one sixth. However, since winning the service combination 1 is not a condition for ending the third service game (that is, no transition is made to another service game), even if the service combination 1 is won, the third service game is continuously performed. Similarly, winning of the bell 1 is not an end condition of the third service game, so that even if the winning of the bell 1 is won, the third service game is continued.

  In addition, when winning the bell 1 or the bell 2, it is not possible to grasp from the display of the effect display device 15 which of the bells 1 and 2 is won. Also, no matter which of the bells 1 and 2 is won, the number of prize balls paid out is the same as 25, so which of the bells 1 and 2 is won? Also, it is not possible to grasp from the number of prize balls paid out. Thereby, when a bell is won when the third service game is being performed, the player has a sense of expectation that the player may shift to the second service game. In addition, when winning the bell 1 or the bell 2, it is difficult to grasp which of the bell 1 and the bell 2 is won, so the player is a bell that shifts to the second service game. It is also interesting to predict whether or not.

  On the other hand, regardless of which of the service combination 1 and the service combination 2 is won, the first service game will not be entered, and the third service game will continue to be played unless other end conditions are met. As a result, even if a picture reminiscent of the service role is displayed on the effect display device 15, the next game can be played without taking in the game ball without worrying about shifting to the first service game. In other words, even if the service role 1 symbol or the service role 2 symbol is complete when the third service game is being played, the service role 1 symbol or the service role 2 symbol is correct when the 4th service game is being played. There is no need to worry about the transition to the first service game as in the case of. As described above, when the service combination 2 symbols are prepared, the player is in spite of the same design (service combination 2) depending on whether the third service game is being performed or the fourth service game is being performed. The profits to be given will be different.

  By the way, in this embodiment, although the probability to the service combination in a 4th service game is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, it is disadvantageous compared with a 4th service game among several service games. In other words, the fourth service game is harder to win than the base game, but among the plurality of service games, it is easier to win the lose than the fourth service game, and the rate of decrease in the possession ball is higher.

  If 50 games are played without winning either the service combination 2 or the bell 2, the normal state is set.

  In this way, in the third service game to be played after the BB is finished, there is no possibility of shifting to the first service game, and it is possible to play a game with the expectation of shifting to the second service game. it can. In other words, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning probability of BB is lower than the winning probability of RB, when the BB that is a rare bonus is won, the above-mentioned 4th after the end of the BB game. A third service game having a game characteristic different from that of the service game is played. In the third service game, while the player's holding ball is comparatively suppressed and the game is played with peace of mind without falling to the first service game, the promotion or bonus to the second service game is achieved. Since it can be expected to win, the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as in the case where the fourth service game is being performed, when the service combination 1 is won, the symbols on the active line when all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 13 are stopped are displayed. The combination mode is “H male design-I male design-H male design”.

  When the service combination 2 is won, the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line when all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 13 are stopped is “H male symbol-T child symbol— "H male design".

  In addition, when the symbol 1 is won, all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 13 are stopped. The symbol combination on the active line is “M child symbol-T child symbol-M child”. "Design".

  Further, when winning the bell 2, when all the symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 13 are stopped, the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line is “M child symbol-I male symbol-M child”. "Design".

  Therefore, when the player first operates, for example, the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 and the "I male symbol" stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the service combination 1 or the bell 2 is won. There is a possibility. When the third service game is being played, if the winning combination is service combination 1, the third service game is continued without shifting to another service game, while if the winning combination is bell 2 The player shifts to a second service game that is advantageous to the player in that the number of game balls held by the player increases.

  Further, when the “T child symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b by the player first operating the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10, for example, the service combination 2 or the bell 1 is won. There is a possibility. At this time, the third service game is continuously performed without shifting to another service game unless another end condition is satisfied.

  As described above, when the player operates the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 for the first time when the third service game is being performed, the game is played depending on the symbol stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. One will be angry. Specifically, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 and the "I male symbol" stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the game proceeds to the second service game. You will have a sense of expectation.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, “H” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “male symbol” stops, there is a possibility that the service combination 1 or the service combination 2 is won. When the third service game is being played, regardless of whether the winning combination is the service combination 1 or the service combination 2, the third service game is continuously performed without shifting to another service game.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, “H” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “male symbol” stops, it may have won the bell 1 or the bell 2. When the third service game is being played, if the winning role is Bell 1, the third service game is continued without shifting to another service game, while if the winning role is Bell 2, The game shifts to a second service game that is advantageous to the player in that the number of game balls held by the player increases.

  As described above, even when the player operates the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 first, and then operates the right reel stop button 10c when the third service game is being performed. Depending on the symbols stopped on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line, the player will be relieved. Specifically, the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10, and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, so that the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “M child symbol” is stopped at the same time, a sense of expectation for shifting to the second service game is held. In addition, although the winning combination can be grasped when the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped, it cannot be grasped until all reels are stopped as to whether or not to shift to another service game. Until the end of the game, the player cannot be discouraged and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the third service game is being performed, when the player first operates, for example, the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c, and when each reel is stopped. For example, when the left reel stop button 10a among the buttons 10 is first operated and then the right reel stop button 10c is operated, each time the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c are operated. There is a possibility that a sense of expectation may be given, and an innovative gaming machine that has never existed can be provided.

  If service combination 2 is won in the third service game, as can be seen from FIG. 58 (d), if the extracted random number value is 9517, service combination 2 and BB are selected and won. When the extracted random number value is 9636, service combination 2 and RB are won in duplicate. On the other hand, the probability per single winning of service combination 2 is zero.

  In this way, in the third service game, the probability of winning the service combination 2 is zero, and the service combination 2 only wins in duplicate with the BB or RB, so the probability that the service combination 2 symbols are aligned. Is extremely low. However, when the service combination 2 symbols are prepared in the third service game, it will be won for BB or RB, so when the player has the service combination 2 symbols that he / she thinks cannot be aligned Will not only give a surprise to the player, but will also give great joy, and can suppress the decline of interest.

  On the other hand, in the third service game, when the player wins the bell 2, the game is almost always transferred to the second service game, but is not always transferred to the second service game. As can be seen from FIG. 58 (d), when the extracted random number value is 9515, Bell 2 and BB are selected in duplicate and the extracted random value is any one of 9615 to 9634. Will win both Bell 2 and RB.

  As described above, when winning the bell 2 in the third service game is one of the transition conditions to the second service game, when the bell 2 is won in the third service game, the bell 2 And BB or RB may be won together (in this case, the game does not shift to the second service game). Thereby, even if it is a case where the bell 2 is won in the third service game, the BB game or the RB game may be played rarely without shifting to the second service game. Here, in the BB game and the RB game, more prize balls can be acquired in a shorter period than in the case where the second service game is played, so even if the player wins the bell 2 in the third service game, the player is disappointed. Rather, a BB game or RB game that is more advantageous to the player than the second service game is played. Thereby, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, regardless of whether BB or RB is won, a service game that can shift to the second service game advantageous to the player is performed after the BB game ends and after the RB ends. As a result, it is possible to avoid quitting the game immediately after the BB game or RB game is finished, and to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Further, the third service game played after the end of the BB game and the fourth service game played after the end of the RB game have an advantage for the player in that the speed of decrease of the game balls held by the player is different. Are different. In this way, by playing a service game having a different degree of advantage for the player depending on the type of bonus game, the games after the bonus game are diversified, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player is less likely to get bored.

[Normal game]
The normal game is a game that is performed during a normal state in which neither the BB game nor the RB game is performed and any service game is performed.

  In this normal game, the winning probability of service combination 2 is approximately 1/32 and the winning probability of Bell 2 is approximately 1/32. That is, the probability of shifting to the second service game is equal to the probability of shifting to the first service game.

  In this normal game, the winning probability of service combination 1 is approximately one third, and the winning probability of bell 1 is approximately one sixth. However, since winning the service combination 1 is not a condition for shifting to the service game, even if the service combination 1 is won, the normal game continues. Similarly, since winning for Bell 1 is not a condition for shifting to the service game, the normal game continues even if Bell 1 is won.

  In addition, when winning the bell 1 or the bell 2, it is not possible to grasp from the display of the effect display device 15 which of the bells 1 and 2 is won. Also, no matter which of the bells 1 and 2 is won, the number of prize balls paid out is the same as 25, so which of the bells 1 and 2 is won? Also, it is not possible to grasp from the number of prize balls paid out. As a result, when the player wins the bell during the normal game, the player has a sense of expectation that the player may shift to the second service game. In addition, when winning the bell 1 or the bell 2, it is difficult to grasp which of the bell 1 and the bell 2 is won, so the player is a bell that shifts to the second service game. It is also interesting to predict whether or not.

  Similarly, when the service combination 1 or the service combination 2 is won, it cannot be determined from the display of the effect display device 15 which of the service combination 1 and the service combination 2 is won. Furthermore, since the service game can be executed even if any of the service combination 1 and service combination 2 is won, either service combination of service combination 1 or service combination 2 is selected. It has become more difficult to understand whether or not As a result, when the service combination is won during the normal game, the player has a desire not to move to the first service game. In addition, when winning service combination 1 or service combination 2, it is difficult to determine which service combination of service combination 1 or service combination 2 is won, so the player can enter the first service game. It is also interesting to predict whether or not it is a service role to be transferred.

  If BB or RB is won without winning any of the service combination 2 and the bell 2, the game shifts to the fifth service game until the BB game or RB game is played.

  In this way, in the base game, depending on the winning combination, the number of game balls held by the player increases in terms of the second service game that is more advantageous to the player than the base game, or the number of game balls held by the player decreases. In this regard, the first service game may be disadvantageous to the player. The first service game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or a service game more advantageous than the first service game unless 250 games are played or BB or RB is won. .

  Further, when “I male symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b by first operating, for example, the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10, the service combination 1 or the bell 2 is won. There is a possibility. If the winning combination is the service combination 1 while the normal game is being played, the normal game will continue without shifting to any service game, while if the winning combination is the bell 2, the game ball held by the player will be It shifts to the 2nd service game advantageous for a player in the point which increases.

  Further, when the “T child symbol” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b by the player first operating the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10, for example, the service combination 2 or the bell 1 is won. There is a possibility. If the winning combination is Bell 1 while the normal game is in progress, the normal game continues without shifting to any service game. On the other hand, if the winning combination is service combination 2, the game ball held by the player The first service game, which is disadvantageous for the player in terms of rapid decrease, is entered. The first service game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or a service game more advantageous than the first service game unless 250 games are played or BB or RB is won. .

  In this way, in the normal game, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10, the player will be delighted by the design stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. . Specifically, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 and the "I male symbol" stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the game proceeds to the second service game. While having a sense of expectation, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the first service game as a trigger, and the user is relieved. In addition, when the player first operates the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10 and the “T child symbol” stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player does not want to shift to the first service game. While wishing, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the second service game, and the player is relieved. That is, the symbol “I male symbol” drawn on the middle reel 301b functions as a safe symbol that may be transferred to the second service game but not transferred to the first service game. The drawn symbol “T child symbol” functions as an out symbol that may shift to the first service game despite the possibility of shifting to the second service game. Further, since the winning combination cannot be grasped until all the reels are stopped, the player cannot be distracted until the end of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, “H” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “male symbol” stops, there is a possibility that the service combination 1 or the service combination 2 is won. If the winning combination is the service combination 1 when the normal combination is being played, the normal game will continue without shifting to any service game, while if the winning combination is the service combination 2, the game ball held by the player It shifts to the first service game which is disadvantageous for the player in that the decrease of the game is quick. The first service game is disadvantageous for the player in that it does not shift to a normal game or a service game more advantageous than the first service game unless 250 games are played or BB or RB is won. .

  Further, when the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, “H” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. If the “male symbol” stops, it may have won the bell 1 or the bell 2. While the base game is in progress, if the winning role is Bell 1, the normal game will continue without shifting to any service game, while if the winning role is Bell 2, the number of game balls held by the player will increase Therefore, the second service game is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, even when the player operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10 first, and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, the left reel 301a and the right reel on the active line. Depending on the design stopped at 301c, the player will be depressed. Specifically, the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10, and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, so that the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “H male symbol” is stopped at the same time, it is determined that the game will not be transferred to the second service game, but there is still a possibility to shift to the first service game. I hope you don't. In addition, the player first operates, for example, the left reel stop button 10a among the reel stop buttons 10, and then operates the right reel stop button 10c, so that “M” is applied to the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line. When the “child symbol” is stopped, the player has a sense of expectation to shift to the second service game, but is relieved that the game will not be transferred to the first service game. In other words, the symbol “H male symbol” drawn on the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c on the active line may shift to the first service game even though there is no possibility of shifting to the second service game. The symbol “M child symbol” drawn on the middle reel 301b functions as a safe symbol that may be transferred to the second service game but not transferred to the first service game. To do. Further, although the winning combination can be grasped when the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped, since it is not possible to grasp whether or not to shift to the service game until all reels are stopped, until the end of the game. The player can not be discouraged and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, during the normal game, when the player first operates, for example, the middle reel stop button 10b among the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, and 10c, and among the reel stop buttons 10 For example, when the left reel stop button 10a is first operated and then the right reel stop button 10c is operated, every time the reel stop buttons 10a, 10b, c0 are operated, expectation and disappointment A sense of inconvenience is mixed, and an innovative gaming machine that has never existed can be provided.

  In addition, although it is almost always transferred to the first service game when the service combination 2 is won in the normal game, it does not always shift to the first service game. As can be seen from FIG. 58 (a), when the extracted random number value is 5717, service combination 2 and BB are selected in duplicate, and when the extracted random number value is 5836, service combination 2 and RB wins in duplicate.

  As described above, when winning the service combination 2 in the normal game is one of the conditions for shifting to the first service game, when the service combination 2 is won in the normal game, At the same time, BB or RB may be won (at this time, the game does not shift to the first service game). Thereby, even if it is a case where the service combination 2 is won in the base game, the BB game or the RB game may be played rarely without shifting to the first service game. Therefore, when the service combination 2 is won in the base game, the interest can be suppressed from being reduced by giving the player a sense of expectation of winning the BB or RB.

  Similarly, in the base game, when the player wins the bell 2, the transition to the second service game is almost performed, but the transition to the second service game is not always performed. As can be seen from FIG. 58 (a), when the extracted random number value is 5715, Bell 2 and BB are selected in duplicate and the extracted random number value is any one of 5815 to 5834. Will win both Bell 2 and RB.

  As described above, when winning the bell 2 in the base game is one of the conditions for shifting to the second service game, when the base 2 wins the bell 2, the BB is combined with the bell 2 in the normal game. Or, RB may be won (at this time, it does not shift to the second service game). Thereby, even if it is a case where the bell 2 is won in the base game, the BB game or the RB game may be played rarely without shifting to the second service game. Here, in the BB game and the RB game, more prize balls can be acquired in a shorter period than in the case of the normal game, so that the player is delighted and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[First service game]
As described above, the first service game is the service combination when the service combination 2 is won during the normal game (when the service combination 2 symbols are prepared) or when the third service game is being performed. This is done when 2 is won.

  In this first service game, the probability per service winning of the service combination 2 is zero (there is a possibility of winning in duplicate with BB or RB). Once the first service game is entered, as described above, the first service game will not end unless 250 games are played in the first service game or BB or RB is won. In addition, the first service game has the fastest decrease in the number of game balls held by the player among all the service games (almost the same as the normal game). Unless the 250 game is played or BB or RB is won, Since it does not shift to games or other more advantageous service games, the player desires to win BB or RB at an early stage.

  By the way, since the first service game is played by winning the service combination 2 before the transition to the first service game (that is, the base game or the third service game), I have no good image for 2. That is, it is impressed to the player that if the service combination 2 is won, the player will be in a disadvantageous state. However, in the first service game, when the service combination 2 is won, the BB or the RB is always won. Therefore, when the service combination 2 is won, the BB game or the RB game is actually played.

  As described above, in the base game or the fourth service game, the winning combination such as the service combination 2 that is unsatisfactory for the player becomes the double winning combination for the BB or RB in the first service game, and the winning combination that is extremely advantageous for the player is (In other words, the player receives the impression that the service role 2 is promoted from the bad role to the good role). Thereby, although the same winning combination such as the service combination 2, the subsequent return varies depending on the type of the service game, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  Even when the base game or the fourth service game is being played, service combination 2 and BB or RB can win a duplicate, but when service combination 2 is won, most of them are per single selection. Therefore, the player is unlikely to receive an impression that a BB game or an RB game is played when the service combination 2 is won. On the other hand, in the first service game, the probability of overlapping winning of service combination 2 and BB or RB is low, but when winning service combination 2, BB game or RB game is always played, so BB or RB originally The service combination 2 that cannot be won is the role that confirms the winning of BB or RB. That is, in the first service game, the player receives the impression that the BB game or the RB game is played even when the service combination 2 that cannot be won in the BB or RB in the base game or the third service game is won. Although it is slight, it comes to have the impression that the frequency with which a BB game and RB game are performed is raised, and can suppress the fall of interest.

  In addition, in the base game, the third service game, and the fourth service game before the transition to the first service game, if the player wins the bell 2, the player transitions to the second service game. Will be held. However, in the first service game, even if the player wins the bell 2, the second service game is not awarded, and the game ball is simply paid out in the same manner as when the player wins the bell 1. However, as in the third service game and the fourth service game described above, in the first service game, the bell 2 may sometimes win a duplicate of BB or RB. That is, even in the first service game, when the bell 2 is won, a BB game or an RB game may be played.

  In this way, the winning combination such as Bell 2 that gives a good impression to the player can be the winning combination that can be won by BB or RB in the first service game, and can be the most advantageous winning combination for the player (that is, Bell 2 Players get the impression of being promoted from the good role to the best role). As a result, in the first service game, even if the second service game is won, the second service game is not given, but the role that is more advantageous to the player than the second service game (that is, the most advantageous to the player) (A bonus role, which is an important role) can be won repeatedly, not only to prevent disappointment of the player, but also to improve the expectation of the bonus game, to reduce the monotony of the game and suppress the decline of interest it can.

[Second service game]
As described above, when the second service game is won in the normal game, the bell 2 is won (when the bell 2 symbols are prepared), or when the third service game is played in the bell 2 Or, when the fourth service game is being played and the bell 2 is won.

  Even in the second service game, the probability of winning alone for service combination 2 is zero (there is a possibility of winning in duplicate with BB or RB). Moreover, once it shifts to this 2nd service game, unless it wins BB or RB in the said 2nd service game as mentioned above, it will continue until this 2nd service game is played 50 games. In addition, in this second service game, the number of game balls held by the player increases, so that BB or RB is won before moving to another service game that is more disadvantageous to the player than this second service game. You want to want it.

  By the way, in the base game or the fourth service game before the transition to the second service game, when the service combination 2 is won, the player shifts to the first service game, so the player has a good image of the service combination 2. Absent. In other words, the player recognizes that, in the base game or the fourth service game, the bell 2 happens to be won before the service combination 2 and fortunately it has just shifted to the second service game. There is a high possibility that the player will still have an impression that it will be disadvantageous for the player if he wins. However, in the second service game, when the service combination 2 is won, the BB or RB is always won. Therefore, when the service combination 2 is won, the BB game or the RB game is actually played.

  In this way, in the base game or the fourth service game, the winning combination such as service combination 2 that is unsatisfactory for the player becomes the winning combination of BB or RB in the second service game, and the winning combination that is extremely advantageous for the player is (In other words, the player receives the impression that the service role 2 is promoted from the bad role to the good role). Thereby, although the same winning combination such as the service combination 2, the subsequent return varies depending on the type of the service game, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  Even when the base game or the fourth service game is being played, service combination 2 and BB or RB can win a duplicate, but when service combination 2 is won, most of them are per single selection. Therefore, the player is unlikely to receive an impression that a BB game or an RB game is played when the service combination 2 is won. On the other hand, in the second service game, the probability of overlapping winning of service combination 2 and BB or RB is low, but when winning service combination 2, BB game or RB game is always played, so BB or RB originally The service combination 2 that cannot be won is the role that confirms the winning of BB or RB. In other words, in the second service game, the player receives the impression that the BB game or the RB game is played even when the service combination 2 that cannot be won in the BB or RB in the base game or the fourth service game is won. Although it is slight, it comes to have the impression that the frequency with which a BB game and RB game are performed is raised, and can suppress the fall of interest.

  In addition, in the base game, the third service game, and the fourth service game before the transition to the second service game, if the player wins the bell 2, the player shifts to the second service game. Will be held. However, in the second service game, even if the second service game is won, the second service game is not given twice, so that the game ball is simply paid out in the same manner as in the case where the second service game is won. is there. However, as in the third service game and the fourth service game described above, in the second service game, the bell 2 may sometimes win BB or RB. That is, even in the second service game, when the bell 2 is won, a BB game or an RB game may be played.

  In this way, the winning combination such as Bell 2 that gives a good impression to the player can be a winning combination that can be duplicated for BB or RB in the second service game, and can be the most advantageous winning combination for the player (that is, Bell 2 Players get the impression of being promoted from the good role to the best role). As a result, in the second service game, even if the second service game is won, the second service game is not repeatedly granted, but the role that is more advantageous to the player than the second service game (that is, the most player) (A bonus role that is advantageous to the game) can be won repeatedly, not only to prevent the disappointment of the player, but also to improve the expectation of the bonus game, to reduce the monotony of the game and reduce the interest Can be suppressed.

  In addition, if 50 games are played without winning BB or RB in the second service game, the game becomes a normal game thereafter. In addition, when the player wins the bell 2 in this normal game, the game is shifted to the second service game again. Therefore, even if 50 games of the second service game are played and the game is shifted to the normal game, the player is not discouraged, and it is unlikely that the game is ended just because the second service game is ended. Thereby, the fall of the operating rate of a game machine can be suppressed.

[Fifth service game]
As described above, the fifth service game is played after winning BB or RB until the BB symbol or RB symbol is aligned.

  In this fifth service game, the probability of winning BB or RB is zero. That is, once the BB flag or RB flag is turned ON, BB or RB will not be won unless a BB game or RB game is played.

  Further, the probability of winning a service role or a small role is not much different from that in the normal game, and the probability of being lost is not much different from that in the normal game.

  Further, as described above, the reel pull-in control is performed in the priority order of the service role symbol, the BB symbol (or RB symbol), and the small role symbol when the plurality of winning combinations overlap. Therefore, if the service combination is won while the fifth service game is being played, the BB game or RB game will not start with the game as a trigger even though the BB flag or RB flag is ON. In the meantime, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances interest by the effect display device 15. Furthermore, if a small role is won while the fifth service game is being played, the BB symbol or the RB symbol may fail, but the BB symbol or the RB symbol may be aligned, although it is possible to align the BB symbol or the RB symbol. If you can't, you will get the winning small role symbols. As a result, in the game won for the small role, even if the BB symbol or the RB symbol cannot be aligned due to the failure of the pushing operation, other winning small role symbols are arranged, so the game ball held by the player It is possible to play the next game without reducing the game, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Basic playability of ball throwing machine 1]
Here, the basic game characteristics of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 that has a configuration in which a game ball is used as a game medium and in which a game proceeds as described above will be described.

  First, in the main ball throwing and revolving machine 1, when an RB symbol is derived by winning an RB having a relatively high winning frequency among a plurality of bonus combinations, a prize ball having relatively few players as a bonus game. An RB game that can acquire (for example, 525) is awarded. Further, when a BB symbol is derived by winning a BB having a relatively low winning frequency among a plurality of bonus combinations, the player acquires a relatively large number of prize balls (eg, 1400) as a bonus game. A possible BB game is executed. That is, although both RB and BB are bonus combinations, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the bonus game is different, and the BB game is advantageous to the player because the number of prize balls that can be obtained is larger than that of the RB game.

  Furthermore, although both RB and BB are controlled by a service game that is advantageous to the player after the bonus game is played, the third service game is controlled after the BB game is played. The fourth service game, which is controlled after the RB game is played, has the following advantages.

  That is, in the fourth service game after the RB game is given, when the service role 2 symbol is derived, the gaming state is controlled to the first service game in principle. This means that the gaming state is demoted from a state advantageous to the player (fourth service game) to a disadvantageous state (first service game) because the service combination 2 symbol is derived.

  On the other hand, in the third service game after the BB game is awarded, even if the service role 2 symbol is derived, the gaming state is not controlled by the first service game, and the fifth service game can be given a bonus game. Be controlled. That is, even if the service combination 2 symbol is derived, it is not determined that the gaming state should be transferred to the first service game, so that the gaming state is not demoted to the first service game. On the contrary, when the service combination 2 symbol is derived, a bonus game is awarded, which means that it is most advantageous for the player.

  In detail, when controlled by the third service game, unlike when controlled by the fourth service game, the bonus combination is always selected by the internal lottery when the service combination 2 symbol is derived. It is trying to be. More specifically, in the third service game of this embodiment, when the service combination 2 is selected, the bonus combination (BB, RB) is always won in duplicate with the service combination 2. Therefore, when controlled by the third service game, even if the service combination 2 symbol is derived, the bonus game is awarded without being demoted to the first service game.

  As described above, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, by using the RB with a relatively small amount of prize balls as the main bonus combination (main bonus combination), the overall winning combination probability is relatively high. And the player can win the bonus combination at a relatively early stage from the start of the game. Then, after the RB game is granted, the younger brother 4 service game to which either the first privilege (bonus game) or the second privilege (second service game) can be selectively given as the privilege is controlled. Thus, by making it possible to acquire a further bonus game or second service game at an earlier stage, the player can have a gameability that allows the number of possessed balls to be gradually increased as the game continues.

  By the way, while a general slot machine uses medals as game media, the main ball throwing and spinning machine 1 uses game balls as game media. Here, in general, the game value per game medium is several times larger than a game ball (for example, the number of game media required for one bet is one medal) 5 game balls). For this reason, in the case of a revolving type gaming machine having the same game characteristics, the amount of game media inserted and paid out as the game progresses is larger when game balls are used than when medals are used as game media. In other words, in a spinning-reel game machine that uses game balls as game media, the player feels that the number of possessed balls decreases more quickly than in a slot machine that uses medals, while paying in one bonus game. It has a feature that it feels a lot of prize balls.

  In view of these characteristics, the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 uses the RB with a relatively small amount of prize balls as the main bonus combination, so that the player can play enough balls even if the prize balls are little to be paid out. The feeling of winning and the feeling of winning can be given, and the overall number of bonuses won can be set high to make it easier for you to win bonuses at a relatively early stage. The demerit of being able to be eliminated. Such a ball throwing and revolving machine 1 realizes optimal gaming characteristics utilizing the characteristics of a spinning type gaming machine using a gaming ball as a gaming medium, and the game is continuously played without the player getting bored. Can be enjoyed, and has an interest not found in conventional swing-type game machines.

  Further, in a spinning-type game machine using a game ball as a game medium, unlike a slot machine using medals, a process for taking a game ball from a storage tray by a game ball take-in device is required for each game. By the way, in the conventional slot machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is general to adopt a game characteristic that pays a large amount of game media in one bonus game by suppressing the overall bonus winning probability. Is. However, if the playability of a revolving game machine that uses a game ball with a game value smaller than a medal as a game medium is adopted, the number of possessed balls is reduced quickly in a normal game in which payout of the game ball is suppressed. There is a problem that the frequency of the player supplying the game balls to the storage tray increases and the burden increases. In addition, if a large amount of game media is paid out in a single bonus game, the prize ball from which the storage tray is paid out will be filled immediately, and the player will transfer the overflowing prize ball from the storage tray. There was a problem that there was no room for game operations because the work was changed.

  Even in that respect, the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 can win a bonus role at an appropriate frequency in a normal game by using an RB with a relatively small amount of award balls as a main bonus role. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the work load of the player supplying the game balls to the storage tray 20. In addition, when an RB is won, an appropriate amount of prize balls can be paid out, so that the work burden of the player transferring the prize balls overflowing from the storage tray 20 can be reduced appropriately.

  Furthermore, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, BB, which is a rare bonus combination (sub-bonus combination), which rarely pays out award balls, can be won. When this rare BB is won, a BB game that can acquire more prize balls than the RB game is executed. Further, after the BB game is executed, as in the fourth service game after the RB game is executed, any of the first privilege (bonus game) and the second privilege (second service game) is used as the privilege. The game is controlled to a third service game that can be selectively given. However, when the service role 2 symbol is derived, the third service game is provided with a bonus game without being demoted to the first service game even if the service role 2 symbol is derived. This is much more advantageous than the fourth service game demoted.

  In other words, winning BB, which is a rare bonus combination, not only provides more prize balls than winning RB, which is the main bonus combination, but is also advantageous in service games after the bonus game is executed. It becomes. For this reason, winning BB instead of RB makes it possible to obtain a sense of acquisition and a sense of expectation that is more than the fact that there are many prize balls in the bonus game, and the fun of the game is achieved at the climax. This can prevent the monotony of the game due to the adoption of RBs with relatively few payouts of prize balls as the main bonus combination, and a player who wants to win a large number of prize balls in one bonus game Can satisfy the desires of people and can suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, when the game state is controlled by the service game after the bonus game (the third service game or the fourth service game), if the bell 2 symbol is derived, the service game is Regardless of whether the game is the third service game or the fourth service game, the game state is controlled to the most advantageous service game (second service game). As a result, in the fourth service game, the gaming state may be promoted to the second service game, while the gaming state may be demoted to the first service game. In the third service game, the gaming state can be promoted to the second service game, but the gaming state is not demoted to the first service game.

  Thus, even if the service game (the third service game or the fourth service game) to which two bonus games, the bonus game and the second service game can be selectively given, is the first service game in the fourth service game. While the game is played with a sense of tension that the player may be demoted, the third service game is played with a sense of security that there is no risk of being demoted to the first service game. And even if it is a service game after the same bonus game, the bonus game is ended by providing a plurality of service games (third service game and fourth service game) having different degrees of advantage and game contents for the player. Diversifying the game state later, we have realized a game that is difficult to get tired of, with a decline in interest.

  By the way, in the ball throwing / retracting machine 1, when one of the main bonus combination RB and the rare bonus combination BB is won, the game state after the bonus game is performed as described above is advantageous to the player. Control service games (the third service game and the fourth service game), in these service games, the winning probability for the service role in the internal lottery is set to a probability that is more advantageous to the player than the first service game Is done. That is, the service game after the bonus game has a higher probability of winning the service role than the first service game, regardless of whether the service game is the third service game or the fourth service game. Therefore, it is possible to expect the bonus game or the second service game to be given without reducing the possession ball, and the interest of the game is maintained even after the bonus game is finished.

  However, in the fourth service game, the probability of winning the service combination in the internal lottery is set to a probability more advantageous to the player than in the third service game. That is, the fourth service game is more advantageous than the third service game in that the winning probability for the service role in the fourth service game is higher than the winning probability for the service role in the third service game. ing.

  In other words, when winning the main bonus combination RB, the number of prize balls won in the bonus game is smaller than when winning the rare bonus combination BB, but the service game after the bonus game Probability of winning the service role at is preferential. Therefore, in the fourth service game, the winning probability for the service role is higher than that in the third service game, so that the bonus game or the second service game is further reduced in a manner in which the decrease in the number of holding balls is suppressed as much as possible. Can be expected. This suppresses the discouragement of the player when winning an RB with a small number of winning balls, not a BB with a large number of winning balls.

  In addition, the third service game is more advantageous than the fourth service game in that it does not fall into the first service game, while the fourth service game has a higher probability of winning the service role. By making the game more advantageous than the game, the service games after the bonus (the third service game and the fourth service game) are advantageous for the player, but have different merits depending on the winning type of the bonus combination. Added service games. In this way, the game state after the bonus game is brought into diversity according to the winning combination of the bonus combination, thereby realizing a timeless gaming.

  In the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, as described above, the overall bonus winning probability can be set to a relatively high probability by using the RB with a small number of prize balls as the main bonus combination. The player can win the bonus combination at a relatively early stage from the start of the game. Furthermore, after the RB game is granted, the bonus service and the second service game can be acquired at an earlier stage by controlling to the fourth service game in which the winning probability for the service role is greatly favored. ing. In other words, the more the game is continued by repeating the winning of the RB having a relatively high winning frequency (that is, the RB game) and the fourth service game having a high winning probability for the service role, the more the game is continued. The game has the ability to gradually increase the player's ball.

  By the way, if the winning of RB having a relatively high winning frequency (that is, the RB game) and the fourth service game having a high winning probability for the service role are repeated excessively, there is an opportunity to reduce the player's ball. There may be a problem that the balance with the hall cannot be achieved. Therefore, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, as described above, when the service combination 2 symbol is derived in the fourth service game, the gaming state is controlled to the first service game. That is, when the service combination 2 symbol is derived in the fourth service game, it means that the gaming state is demoted from a state advantageous to the player (fourth service game) to a disadvantageous state (first service game). Therefore, while increasing the interest of the game by continuously winning the RB (RB game) and the fourth service game, the player feels nervous by the fall opportunity of the transition to the first service game, and the sense of tension of the fourth service game And the balance between the hole and the player can be achieved.

[Basic control of production operation]
The above is an example of control by the main control board 400 (mainly, the main control CPU). In the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, various types are controlled by the sub board 360 (mainly the peripheral control CPU) as the game progresses. Control the production operation. This is executed by the sub board 360 based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main control board 400. As described above, various commands output from the main control board 400 are temporarily stored in the sub board 360 (specifically, RAM). Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored as an effect mode data table (not shown) in the sub-board 360 (specifically, ROM), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (suggested effect, notification effect, details will be described later), and an effect that notifies the payout of a prize ball (a mode of notifying the payout appearance and the number of payouts may be used) and so on.

  The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, which is an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In this case, it is set as the production of the content that is difficult to notice that it is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

  For example, when the winning flag is BB, the notice effect can clearly know which winning combination the player has won in the game, such as “bonus confirmed!”. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because a large amount of prize balls can be obtained) that is particularly pleasing to players such as BB and RB. That is, when a player wins BB or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate them.

  In addition, as a continuous production mode, there is one corresponding to a gaming state such as a BB game, an RB game, or a service game during a normal game. These are clarifications about the game state, and the player performs these effects (continuous effects) to determine whether the current game state is a normal game or a BB game. It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is inside.

  Then, during a service game with a small number of service games, a continuous effect is executed so that the player can recognize that fact from the start to the end. For example, a display that counts the number of service games, or a sound effect that impresses the crisis as it approaches a specified number of times. In this way, the player can proceed with the game while confirming how many remaining service games there are.

  Further, in a service game with a large number of service games, continuous presentation may be executed, but the count display of the number of service games may not be particularly performed. This is because it is not necessary to worry about the end of the specified number of times when the service game number of service games is a game period that is considerably long as viewed from the player. The fact that the count display of the number of times is not performed has an effect that, for example, if the player does not know the prescribed number of service games, the service game can be continued without being sure how long the service game will continue. be able to.

  The effect modes described above can be executed as image display by the effect display device 15, generation of sound effects by the speaker 130, light emission or lighting by LED decoration, or the like. Such a production mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues the game for a long time. The effect mode is not limited to being executed by the effect display device 15, the speaker 130, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the effect display device 15, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or dot LED may be used. Furthermore, dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at different positions from each reel, and can be started and stopped regardless of player operations as part of the production. It is also possible to provide various effects by providing illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp). By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[Stage production and stage transition control]
Next, stage effects and stage transition control using at least a main image (including moving images) displayed on substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the effect image in each stage, (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect image of the first stage, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect image of the second stage, (c) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of a 3rd stage, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of a 4th stage. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the effect image of the special stage. The following stage effects and stage transition control are executed by the sub-board 360 (specifically, the peripheral control CPU and VDP).

  In the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of “stages” are provided in advance, and when the stage transition condition is satisfied, the stage shifts to any one “stage” and is unique to the “stage”. Stage production is performed. In each “stage”, a main image (including a moving image) representing a motif unique to the “stage” is displayed and controlled as a specific stage effect, and a predetermined sound corresponding to the content of the effect is also displayed. Or a sound effect is output.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75, the effect display device 15 of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 has a total of five stages: a first stage, a second stage, a third stage, a fourth stage, and a special stage. Yes. Then, in the gaming state (that is, the base game and the service game) excluding the bonus game (BB game, RB game), the process proceeds to any one of the first to fourth stages and the special stage. Then, as shown in FIGS. 75A to 75D and FIG. 76, the effect display device 15 displays an effect image unique to the stage effect corresponding to the “stage”.

  Further, in the stage effects executed at each “stage”, the character's motion, background, and the like vary depending on the motif unique to the “stage”. For example, in the “first stage” shown in FIG. 75A, an effect image showing a state where the character is seated in the store is displayed. In the “second stage” shown in FIG. 75 (b), an effect image showing a state where the character is walking on the sidewalk in the daytime is displayed. In the “third stage” shown in FIG. 75 (c), an effect image showing a state in which the character runs the motorcycle at low speed during the day is displayed. In the “fourth stage” shown in FIG. 75 (d), an effect image showing a state in which the character runs the motorcycle at high speed at night is displayed. In the “special stage” shown in FIG. 76, an effect image is displayed in which the character is shown driving the motorcycle at the highest speed in the morning.

  Here, the special stage is a stage in which it is determined that the second service game is being performed internally. That is, when a special stage effect is performed on the effect display device 15, the number of game balls held by the player increases as the game progresses. Will be done. In this way, in the special stage, the game can be played while increasing the number of game balls held, so that the player plays the game while wishing to move to the special stage.

  The above five “stages” are subjected to transition control triggered by the establishment of the stage transition condition so as to depend on the internal gaming state (normal game and each service game) of the ball throwing and spinning machine 1. . In other words, the transition of the “stage” is triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition so that the degree of expectation that the internal gaming state shifts to the special stage differs depending on each “stage”. Specifically, the expectation that the internal gaming state will shift to the special stage is the smallest in the first stage, the second stage is larger than the first stage, the third stage is larger than the second stage, The “stage” is controlled to shift so that the fourth stage is larger than the third stage. In other words, the “stage” indicating that the character's movement is intense and the speed of the motorcycle is high, the higher the expectation that the internal gaming state will shift to the special stage. Further, the degree of expectation is represented by the number of ★ displayed on the effect display device 15 so that the player can easily grasp the degree of expectation to shift to the special stage (FIGS. 75A to 75D). reference). In FIG. 75, it is displayed outside the effect display device 15 for convenience.

  Hereinafter, the stage transition control performed in the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described more specifically and in detail.

  First, except for bonus games (BB game, RB game), as described above, the gaming state most advantageous to the player has the lowest probability of losing and does not shift to the first service game. It is a service game. This is because it is possible to aim for winning the next bonus while increasing the number of game balls during a predetermined period (50G). Therefore, when the internal gaming state shifts to the second service game, the effect image also shifts to the special stage, and an effect image as shown in FIG. 76 is displayed.

  Specifically, the transition condition to the second service game is that the player wins the bell 2 in a predetermined gaming state (normal state, third service game, fourth service game), unless a bonus is established internally. That is. Therefore, in principle, after winning the bell 2 in the predetermined gaming state, the stage effect of “special stage” is continuously executed until the second service game is ended. The stage effect of the “special stage” allows the player to clearly understand that the game has shifted to the second service game, and can enjoy the game in a very advantageous state for the player, the second service game.

  In addition, among gaming states excluding bonus games (BB game, RB game), gaming states that may shift to the second service game (in other words, gaming states that are highly expected to shift to the second service game). Are the third service game and the fourth service game. When the internal gaming state is controlled to be either the third service game or the fourth service game, the stage state is controlled to “fourth stage”, and an effect image as shown in FIG. 75 (d) Is displayed.

  Specifically, since the transition condition to the third service game is the end of the BB game, after the BB game is ended, the stage effect of the “fourth stage” is continuously executed until the third service game is ended. The Similarly, since the transition condition to the fourth service game is the end of the RB game, after the RB game is ended, the stage effect of the “fourth stage” is continuously executed until the fourth service game is ended. The

  The stage effect of the “fourth stage” makes it possible to clearly grasp the transition to a gaming state with a high expectation level for transition to the second service game, and is relatively easy for the player who is the third service game or the fourth service game. You can enjoy the game in an advantageous state. Furthermore, after the bonus game (BB game, RB game) is over, the player knows that the degree of expectation to shift to the second service game is high, and expects after the end of the bonus game where the interest is likely to decline. You can enjoy the game while maintaining the feeling. Thereby, even if the bonus game is ended, the possibility of losing the willingness to continue the game can be reduced, and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, the normal game is also a gaming state in which there is a possibility of shifting to the second service game, like the third service game and the fourth service game. Therefore, the stage state can be controlled to the “fourth stage” even when the internal gaming state is controlled by the normal game. For example, since the transition to the normal game is made after the end of the second service game, the stage effect of the “fourth stage” is continuously executed after the end of the second service game until the end of the normal game. By this stage effect of “fourth stage”, the player knows that the degree of expectation to shift to the second service game is high, and will not return to the second service game again even if the second service game ends. You can enjoy the game while maintaining your expectation.

  That is, among the “stages” shown in FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (d), when the gaming state is controlled to a predetermined gaming state (normal game, third service game, fourth service game) A “fourth stage” (see FIG. 75 (d)) indicating that the second service game is surely given when the Bell 2 symbols are aligned can be displayed. In other words, when the “fourth stage” is displayed, the second service game is always given when the two bell symbols are aligned, so that the internal gaming state is controlled to a predetermined gaming state. Determine. Note that, unlike the other stages, the “fourth stage” does not have a so-called “gasse” display, and functions as a special confirmed effect in which the second service game is always provided when the bell 2 symbols are arranged.

When the stage state is controlled to the “fourth stage” and the bell 2 symbols are aligned as described above, the stage shifts to the “special stage”, while the first to third stages are satisfied according to the following conditions established. Transition to stage (stage demotion) is performed. Specifically, when the stage state is controlled to “fourth stage” and the gaming state is controlled to the base game or the fourth service game, that is,
・ When the second service game is finished and the game is shifted to the normal game, and the stage effect of the “fourth stage” is performed in the normal game. When the service game is finished and the stage game of the “fourth stage” is performed as it is in the base game that has been moved thereafter. ・ When the RB game is finished and the fourth service game is being played When the service combination 2 symbols are aligned and the internal gaming state is controlled by the first service game, stage transition control (stage demotion) to any of “first stage” to “third stage” is performed. . It should be noted that which of the plurality of lower stages is to be demoted is determined according to the result of the stage shift lottery described later. However, as described above, even if the service combination 2 is prepared, there are rare cases where BB or RB is won.

  In the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect display device 15 is arranged at a position substantially in front of the player's face, and the symbol variation display device 13 is arranged above the effect display device 15. Has been. Moreover, since the display area of the effect display device 15 is larger than that of the symbol variation display device 13, when the player plays a game with a reasonable posture, the player easily sees the image displayed on the effect display device 15. be able to. On the other hand, when the player plays a game with a reasonable posture, it is more difficult for the player to see the image displayed on the symbol variation display device 13 than to see the image displayed on the effect display device 15. Become. Thus, unless the player is conscious of playing the game while looking at the symbol variation display device 13, the player will watch the effect image displayed on the effect display device 15 during the game. This means that the effect display device 15 is arranged in the player's gaze area during the game, while the symbol variation display device 13 is arranged outside the player's gaze area during the game.

  As a result, an advanced player who is confident in the appearance often plays a game while looking at the symbol variation display device 13, while a player who finds the effect more interesting than the appearance is displayed in the effect display. The game is often performed while viewing the effect image displayed on the device 15.

  By the way, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, whether or not the effect display device 15 performs a continuous effect mode performed over a plurality of games when winning one of all the small roles and losers that do not overlap with the bonus. Whether or not lottery (continuous production lottery). When the continuous effect lottery is won, the continuous display mode is displayed on the effect display device 15. In this continuous production mode, it is derived that the bonus was not won as a result of the series of productions despite the series of productions performed over a plurality of games (so-called continuous production failure). However, at this time, even if the continuous production fails, there is a possibility of shifting to a special stage, and a double expectation is given to the player with one continuous production. In addition, although the player is disappointed once due to the failure of the continuous performance, the player is moved to the special stage after that, so that the joy given to the player at that time becomes great, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the continuous production lottery is not won, a single production mode that is completed only by one game is displayed. On the other hand, when winning a bonus (including a single winning combination and a shared winning combination), it is always derived that the bonus was won as a result of a series of effects performed over a plurality of games regardless of the continuous effect lottery. A production mode is displayed (so-called continuous production success).

  In addition, it is desirable that when winning a small role as a winning combination, it is easier to win a continuous effect lottery (that is, easier to execute a continuous effect mode) than when winning a winning combination as a winning combination. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the bonus winning will be notified to the small role as a result of the continuous performance mode rather than the loser. In addition, it is desirable that a small role having a higher overlapping ratio with bonuses is more likely to win a continuous performance lottery among small roles. As a result, the player's expectation that a bonus winning will be announced as a result of the continuous performance mode to a bonus role with a lower bonus overlap rate (eg, cherry) than a bonus role with a lower bonus overlap rate (eg, bell). The degree can be increased.

  Further, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, when the effect display device 15 performs a continuous effect mode when winning one of all the small roles and losers that do not overlap with the bonus, A lottery for determining a “stage” to be transferred after performing the mode is performed (stage shift lottery). That is, the above-described continuous performance mode is an opportunity to perform stage transition control, and it is determined by stage shift lottery which stage is to be shifted to after the continuous performance mode is performed.

  By the way, as described above, when the service combination 2 symbols are arranged and the internal gaming state is demoted to the first service game, the continuous effect mode is always displayed regardless of the continuous effect lottery. Then, it is determined by stage shift lottery which of the “first stage” to “third stage” is shifted from the “fourth stage”. Then, while the internal gaming state is controlled by the first service game, the transition control is performed to any one of “first stage” to “third stage” triggered by the execution of the continuous performance mode. (Of course, the same stage may be maintained as it is after the continuous production mode is performed).

  When the internal gaming state is controlled by the first service game, the closer to the predetermined number (250 times) that is the end condition of the service game, the easier it is to win the continuous effect lottery (that is, , Continuous production mode is easy to be executed). Furthermore, a higher stage is easily selected as a transfer destination in the stage transfer lottery. Specifically, the “second stage” higher than the “first stage” is easily selected, and the “third stage” higher than the “second stage” is easily selected.

  In addition to this, when the number of service games of the first service game has reached a predetermined number (250 times), when the first service game is finished and a transition is made to a normal game, the continuous effect lottery is further won. In addition, it becomes easier to select a higher stage as a transition destination in the stage transition lottery. Specifically, a higher “fourth stage” than “first stage” to “third stage” is easily selected.

  As a result, the ratio of the transition from the “fourth stage” to the lower stage and the transitional stage is executed relatively frequently, or the transition to the relatively higher “stage” after the continuous stage is executed. If it becomes high, it is possible to detect that the end of the first service game, which is disadvantageous to the player, or the end of the first service game is ended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to give a clue to guess an internal game state to a player who has started playing a game from the middle, and to increase the pleasure of selecting a table to play from a plurality of ball throwing machine 1.

  In addition, in the “fourth stage” after the bonus game and the “fourth stage” after the second service game described above, in principle, only the “fourth stage” is selected in the stage transition lottery unless two service roles are available. Selected. Therefore, unless the service combination 2 symbols are prepared, the stage effect by the “fourth stage” is continuously executed after the continuous effect mode is executed. In the “fourth stage”, the stage transition lottery is not performed, so that the “fourth stage” may always be maintained after the continuous effect mode is executed.

  As described above, according to the stage performance and stage transition control executed by the ball throwing and spinning machine 1, the degree of expectation that the internal gaming state is advantageous to the player for each of the “stages”. (Specifically, the degree of expectation to enter the second service game that is most advantageous to the player) is large, and each “stage” is controlled to be shifted in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition. Therefore, each stage has a different stage performance and expectation and can change game play, and the player is excited about the promotion of the upper “stage” and the lowering of the “stage”. The monotony of the game in the game state other than the bonus game can be eliminated.

  In addition, since the above stage transition control is performed at the time of continuous production failure, even if a bonus winning is not derived as a result of the continuous production mode, the “stage” that moves after the continuous production mode is expected. It is possible to concentrate the player's interest in the continuous performance mode and suppress the decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the conventional slot machine, after the bonus game is finished or when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific symbol combination (out) is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reel), It is known that a gaming state (so-called RT state) advantageous to a player who is easy to win is given a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 times). However, this is only given as an additional privilege based on the premise of winning a bonus, and does not prevent the progress of the game from being hindered. That is, in the conventional slot machine, the maximum number of medals required to execute one game is three, so there is little possibility that the progress of the game due to the insertion of medals will be hindered. On the other hand, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, since a large amount of game balls (up to 15 balls) are taken in from the game ball take-in device 19, it takes time to take in a large amount of game balls, As a result, the progress of the game is delayed.

  In the ball throwing and revolving machine 1, as a basic flow of the game state, the game state is controlled to the normal game when a predetermined number of games are played at least according to the progress of the game in the first service game. The When the specific condition is satisfied when the gaming state is controlled by the normal game (specifically, when the Bell 2 symbols are aligned), the gaming state is controlled by the second service game (in other words, the second game). Service game is given). As a result, even if the gaming state shifts to the first service game that is disadvantageous to the player, the degree of shifting of the gaming state from the first service game to the second service game increases as the game progresses. Further, until the bonus game (BB game, RB game) is awarded, the progress of the game is controlled in such a manner that the first service game and the normal game are repeated, and the second game is changed from the normal game to the second game almost periodically. A service game can be given.

  That is, the main ball throwing and rolling machine 1 has the first privilege (bonus game) and the second privilege (second service game) as special privileges given according to the result of the internal lottery. And in a predetermined gaming state (normal game, third service game, third service game), since either the first privilege or the second privilege can be selectively given, the expectation of both privileges is always provided. A game can be performed while maintaining the feeling. On the other hand, in a specific gaming state (first service game, second service game), since only the first privilege can be granted, the player's interest is reduced without expectation of the second privilege. Since there is a possibility of being prone to be controlled, the game is controlled to a normal game to which the second privilege can be given periodically, so that it has a game property capable of maintaining interest in all game states.

  In addition, the player recognizes that the second privilege (second service game) is a kind of special privilege that is extremely advantageous to the player over a plurality of games, like the first privilege (bonus game). Therefore, when the provision of these special benefits is started, an effect different from the normal “stage” is displayed on the effect display device 15. Specifically, when the bonus game is started, the first privilege effect (similar to the conventional bonus effect) for congratulating the player to whom the bonus game is given is displayed on the effect display device 15, and the second service game is displayed. When started, the effect display device 15 displays a second privilege effect (“special stage” shown in FIG. 76) that congratulates the player who is given the second service game.

  Then, the “stage” displayed on the effect display device 15 enables the player to grasp the degree of expectation that the second privilege (second service game) will be given, and the second service game is given. A warning is given that there is a possibility of shifting to the “fourth stage” (see FIG. 75D) having the highest degree of expectation. As a result, not only can the user enjoy the “stage” that appropriately shifts in accordance with the progress of the game, but also the timing for shifting to the “fourth stage” according to the transition mode of the “stage” (as a result, the “special service that is granted the second service game” The pleasure of measuring the timing of transition to “stage” occurs. In particular, when moving to the “fourth stage”, since the player perceives that the second service game will always be awarded if the bell 2 symbols are aligned, the expectation for the second service game will increase and the interest will increase significantly. .

  In particular, while “1st to 3rd stages” (see FIGS. 75A to 75C) with low expectations are displayed on the effect display device 15, the second service game even if the bell 2 symbols are aligned. Is not granted, or the second service game is not necessarily granted even if the bell 2 symbols are aligned, but the expectation for the second service game from the “first to third stages” is stepped up step by step Then, when finally moving to the “fourth stage”, since the player perceives that the second service game will be awarded if the bell 2 symbols are aligned, the expectation for the second service game will increase and the interest will be remarkable. To increase.

  In this way, when the “stage” is displayed on the effect display device 15, the expectation for the first privilege (bonus game) is always held, and the second privilege (second service game) is periodically displayed. In addition, the “stage” is appropriately changed to one that has a high expectation level for the second service game, so that the interest of the player gradually improves as the game progresses. Become. Furthermore, when the “fourth stage” is displayed on the effect display device 15, since the second service game is surely given if the bell 2 symbols are aligned, the player's interest will increase at a stretch, This eliminates the player's anxiety that it may be a mere gaze effect, and allows the player to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  Furthermore, when the “special stage” (see FIG. 76) is displayed, in addition to being able to enjoy the game while gradually increasing the game balls by the second service game, after the “special stage” is ended, Since the “fourth stage” (see FIG. 75D) is displayed, the player can grasp that the second service game is surely given again when the bell 2 symbols are aligned. Then, by displaying the “fourth stage” and the “special stage” alternately, the game progresses without the player's interest and excitement being interrupted. Eventually, depending on the number of times the “fourth stage” and “special stage” loops are displayed (that is, the number of loops for the base game and the second service game) It is possible to acquire a larger amount of game balls than the bonus game, and it may be worth more than one bonus game, so the player's interest can be further improved.

[Number of remaining service games on special stage]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the display of the number of remaining service games in the special stage will be described. As described above, FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect image of the special stage, in which (a) illustrates the effect image immediately after the start of the special stage, and (b) is a predetermined image from the start of the special stage. It is a figure which shows the effect image after several games were performed. In the present embodiment, in the “second service game” that is most advantageous to the player among the plurality of service games, the remaining number of service games is displayed in the “special stage” stage shown in FIG. 76.

  More specifically, as described above, when the transition condition to the second service game is established and the internal gaming state transitions to the second service game, the stage state is changed after the continuous performance mode is executed. Move to “special stage”. Then, after the stage state shifts to “special stage”, until the predetermined number of games is executed, the remaining second service game count is unknown on the effect display device 15 as “remaining ?? game”. Is displayed (see FIG. 76A). That is, although a display area for displaying the remaining number of service games is provided on the effect display device 15, a specific remaining number of service games is not clearly indicated.

  Then, after the transition to the second service game, when the service game is executed for a predetermined number of games (here, 20 games), the number of remaining service games is displayed on the effect display device 15 as “30 remaining games”. Is displayed (see FIG. 76B). Thereafter, every time one game is executed, the remaining number of service games is displayed with “1” subtracted. For example, when one game is executed in a state where “30 remaining games” is displayed as the remaining number of service games, the remaining 29 service games are subtracted and displayed as “the remaining 29 games”.

  As a result, the player can clearly grasp how many games the “special stage” (that is, the second service game) will be continued, and the “special stage” can be relieved without suddenly ending. You can enjoy the game. In addition, the number of remaining service games is displayed in a subtracted manner, so that as the remaining number of service games decreases, the player's desire to win the bonus sooner can be stimulated, further enhancing the interest of games during service games Can be made.

  By the way, the “special stage” (that is, the second service game) is a gaming state that is most advantageous to the player except for the bonus. , Referred to as a special stage transition effect). In other words, this special stage transition effect suggests that the degree of expectation to shift to the “special stage” is extremely high. ing.

  Specifically, in this special stage transition effect, in a series of effects over several games, an effect is first made in which a specific character says “I can see XX” in the first game. Then, in the subsequent game (may be the next game or a game several times later), when the object “XX” is displayed, the promotion to the second service game is confirmed, and further from the next game, “special stage Is started. On the other hand, when the target object “XX” is not displayed in the subsequent game, the player is not promoted to the second service game, and another stage selected in the stage transition lottery is started from the next game.

  In fact, if the bell 2 symbols are ready when the special stage transition effect is started, the second service game is started from the next game. The service game is already executed, and the target object “XX” is always displayed in the special stage transition effect, and the process proceeds to the “special stage”. Conversely, if the bell 2 symbols are not ready when the special stage transition effect is started, the internal game state does not change, and the special stage transition effect displays the object “XX”. There is no transition to the “special stage”. That is, even if the player does not refer to the special stage transition effect, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the “special stage” depending on whether or not the bell 2 symbols are aligned in the symbol display window 14.

  In this regard, as described above, the ball throwing and spinning machine 1 of the present embodiment can grasp the configuration in which the symbol variation display device 13 is not easily watched by the player and the winning symbol displayed in the symbol display window 14. Etc. Therefore, the player's interest concentrates exclusively on the effect image displayed on the effect display device 15, and it becomes difficult to determine whether or not to shift to the “special stage” based on whether or not the bell 2 symbols are complete. Yes. Accordingly, it is possible to derive whether or not to shift to the “special stage” with a special stage transition effect executed by the effect display device 15 in an aspect that has an impact beyond the simple appearance that the two bell symbols are aligned. , It can make the player more excited.

  In this way, the number of remaining service games is not specified immediately after entering the “special stage”, but the number of remaining service games is specified after execution of a predetermined number of games for the following reason.

  That is, as described above, when the second bell symbols are arranged in a predetermined gaming state, the second service game is started from the next game, and the “special stage” is executed over several games (for example, three games). Since the transition is made after passing through the continuous performance mode, there is a slight difference (time lag) between the timing at which the second service game is started and the timing at which the “special stage” is started. Therefore, when the number of remaining service games is displayed at the same time as the “special stage” is started, the second service that is executed in the continuous production mode is not the service game number of times “50” that is the end condition of the second service game. It is “47 times” excluding the number of games (that is, 3 games).

  On the other hand, it is normal for the player to recognize that the second service game is started simultaneously with the transition to the “special stage”. As a result, if the number of remaining service games displayed at the same time when the “special stage” is started is displayed as “47 times” which is smaller than the original number of remaining service games “50 times”, the second service game is displayed. There is a problem that the feeling of loss is felt as if it was lost three times and the interest is lowered. Further, if the halfway remaining number of service games such as “47 times” is displayed, the player cannot have a suspicion that an illegal process is being performed in the ball throwing spinning machine 1. Furthermore, if the number of games required for the continuous production mode changes each time according to the result of the continuous production lottery, the number of remaining service games that are different each time will be displayed as the initial value every time the transition to the “special stage”, The player's feelings of loss and suspicion are further increased.

  Therefore, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of times after shifting to the second service game regardless of the timing of shifting to the “special stage” (in other words, regardless of the number of games required for the continuous effect mode). The number of remaining service games has been specified after the number of games has been executed. As a result, even if the timing for shifting to the “special stage” is variable (in other words, even if the number of games required for the continuous production mode changes each time), the “special stage” is not affected by these. Each time it shifts, the same remaining service game count (here, 30) can be displayed as an initial value. In addition, “30 times” which is a natural numerical value (specifically, a multiple of 5 or a multiple of 10) as the counting unit can be displayed as the remaining number of service games.

  Thereby, the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind without having the above-mentioned feeling of loss or doubt about the remaining number of service games. Rather, after the transition to the “special stage”, the number of remaining service games that were not specified at the beginning are clearly indicated after the predetermined number of games have been consumed, so that the “special stage” (number of remaining service games) is as if the It is possible to give an impression as if it has been extended by the number of times (here, 30 times), and to delight the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the maximum remaining number of games can be displayed in the second service game in which the maximum number of games is set in advance, the second service game has the maximum number of games in spite of being set in advance. By displaying that the number of remaining games is unknown without displaying the number of remaining games of the second service game when shifting to the service game, in addition to the above effects, the number of remaining games is preset. It also has the effect of giving the impression that it is rather variable.

  When 50 games are played without winning either BB or RB during the second service game, the second service game ends and becomes a normal game. An image is displayed. In this normal game, if the player wins the bell 2 prior to the service combination 2, the game will be shifted to the second service game internally, and the stage will be shifted to the special stage again via the continuous stage. .

  Thus, even if 50 games are played without winning either BB or RB during the second service game and the second service game is ended, it is disadvantageous for the player like the first service game. Since it shifts to the base game which can transfer to the 2nd service game again instead of shifting to a service game, possibility that the willingness to continue a game may be lost is reduced, and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

[Bet number display meter and bonus expectation level display meter]
Next, a bet number display meter and a bonus expectation level display meter that are displayed substantially on the front face of the effect display device 15 at each stage will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a bet number display meter, and FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a bonus expectation level display meter. Both the bet number display meter and the bonus expectation level display meter are not displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 15, but are displayed only in a part of the area (lower left area) (FIG. 76 (a)). , (B)).

  As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the bet number is zero after the game is over, for example, the hand indicates zero on the bet number display meter. Then, when the 1-bet button 8 is operated once or when five game balls are thrown in, the needle of the bet number display meter indicates 1 as shown in FIG. Further, when the 1-bet button 8 is operated once or five game balls are thrown in, the needle of the bet number display meter points to 2 as shown in FIG. 77 (c). Similarly, when the 1-bet button 8 is further operated once or five game balls are thrown in, the needle of the bet number display meter indicates 3 as shown in FIG. When the hand of the bet number display meter indicates 3, the character “READY” is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that it became the state which can start a game. Then, when the start lever 9 is operated, characters “GO” are displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (e). Thereby, the player can grasp that the game has actually started.

  It should be noted that when the player operates the MAX bet button 7 when the bet number is zero, an aspect (0) indicating that the bet number is zero without going through the processes of FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 (c). FIG. 77 (a)) changes to a mode (FIG. 77 (d)) indicating that the number of bets is three.

  By the way, in this embodiment, as described above, when a service combination symbol or small combination symbol is prepared, the more the number of prize balls to be paid out, the higher the expectation that the BB or RB is won. Therefore, in the ball throwing and revolving machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the service role symbol or the small role symbol is prepared, the number of prize balls paid out is displayed, so that the expectation degree of winning the bonus can be determined by the player. Appeals visually.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, when the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line, prize balls corresponding to the winning combination symbols are paid out, and the number of the awarded winning balls is a bonus expectation degree. Displayed on the display meter. The scale of the bonus expectation display meter includes “re (means that the next game as a service role can be executed again)”, “25 (equivalent to the number of bells to be paid out)”, and “45 (the number of watermelons to be paid out). Equivalent) ”,“ 60 (equivalent to the number of cherries paid out) ”and“ V ”are displayed in the order of low expectation to high expectation.

  Then, when the service combination (service combination 1, service combination 2) is won and the service combination pattern is prepared, the hands of the bonus expectation display meter indicate the vicinity of “re” as shown in FIG. 78 (a), “Re” is displayed. As a result, even if both the service combination 1 and the service combination 2 are arranged, the character “RE” as a symbol indicating the service game is displayed, so that the player can determine whether the service combination 1 has been prepared or not. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is complete. Similarly, when the bells (Bell 1 and Bell 2) are won and the bell symbols are aligned, the bonus expectation display meter hands indicate the vicinity of “25” as shown in FIG. “25” corresponding to the number and a picture of a bell are displayed. As a result, even if either the bell 1 or the bell 2 is aligned, a picture of the bell as a symbol indicating the bell is displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the bell 1 is aligned or the bell 2 is aligned. It becomes. When the watermelon is selected and the watermelon symbols are aligned, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the needle of the bonus expectation display meter indicates the vicinity of “45”, and “45” corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out and A watermelon picture is displayed. Further, when the cherry symbols are selected and the cherry symbols are arranged, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the hands of the bonus expectation degree display meter indicate the vicinity of “60”, and “60” corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out and A picture of cherry is displayed. Also, when BB or RB is won and the BB symbol or RB symbol is aligned, as shown in FIG. 78 (e), “V” is indicated so that the needle of the bonus expectation display meter is completely shaken, and the BB game or RB game Is started. Even if the BB symbol or RB symbol is aligned, the number of prize balls to be paid out is zero, but since the value of the game given to the player is great after that, the needle of the bonus expectation display meter can be swung out. “V” is shown in FIG.

  Thus, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize when the service role symbol or small role symbol is aligned (when the service role symbol is aligned, there is no award ball as an award, so it is understood as zero. ) Is displayed in proportion to the bonus expectation level display meter, it is possible to quantitatively instruct the player on the expectation level that the BB or the RB is repeatedly won.

  In addition, since multiple small roles and BB or RB may be won in duplicate (in this embodiment, watermelon, cherry and BB (RB) may have been won). Depending on the skill of the mainstream (that is, depending on the small roles to be matched), there may be a small role symbol (cherry) with a relatively high expectation, or a small role symbol (watermelon) with a relatively low expectation level. Sometimes it is even. As a result, even if the winning combination is the same, but the expectation displayed on the bonus expectation display meter differs depending on the player's operation, it is possible to align the small role symbol (cherry) with a relatively high expectation In this case, the player feels as if he / she was able to win the BB or RB with his own power, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, the following technical idea can be grasped from the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above. The following technical ideas are provided alone or in appropriate combination. In addition, since the following technical ideas express the present embodiment as the technical idea, the terms described in the present embodiment are expressed in terms of a higher level concept. This generalized term will be described later.

[Technology 1]
The pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 1,
A pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine installed in an island facility supplied with pachinko balls as a game medium,
A pachinko ball supplied from the island facility, and a pachinko ball replenished by a player, a storage unit capable of storing a quantity capable of executing at least one game,
A rotation display device in which a plurality of rotation display rows which are attached with a plurality of symbols and which can be rotated and displayed are arranged side by side in a direction crossing the rotation direction;
A pachinko ball capturing device capable of capturing pachinko balls stored in the reservoir, and
When a considerable amount of pachinko balls are taken in from the storage unit by the pachinko ball take-in device, a start operation unit capable of accepting a player's start operation,
An internal lottery that can win any one of a plurality of winning combinations including at least a bonus combination and a plurality of types of general combinations other than the bonus combination is performed for each game based on a start operation in the start operation unit. Internal lottery means to perform;
A rotation display control means for rotating the plurality of rotation display rows when a start operation is accepted in the start operation unit;
A stop operation unit capable of accepting a stop operation for each of the plurality of rotation display columns in order to stop the plurality of rotation display columns rotated by the rotation display control means for each column;
Rotation display stop control means for controlling the rotation stop of the rotation display row according to the result of the internal lottery for each rotation display row for which a stop operation has been received in the stop operation section;
It is determined whether a combination of symbols formed across all of the plurality of rotation display rows in a predetermined symbol display unit corresponds to any of the symbol combinations corresponding to the plurality of winning combinations. Display symbol determination means;
When the display symbol determining means determines that a combination of symbols corresponding to the general combination has been displayed, a game value is added that gives a game value corresponding to the type of the general combination as a prize for each game Means,
When a pachinko ball is given as the prize, a pachinko ball payout device that pays out the given number of pachinko balls to the storage unit;
When it is determined by the display symbol determination means that a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed, the chance that the pachinko ball as the game value is paid out to the storage unit by the pachinko ball payout device as an award increases. A jackpot game granting means for granting a jackpot game as a privilege,
Except when the jackpot game is awarded, the pachinko game is always played, and the total amount of pachinko balls taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device as the game progresses is paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device. A game state control means for controlling to a normal game state that is greater than the total amount of balls,
With
At least when it is controlled to the normal gaming state by the gaming state control means,
When a single game is executed, a considerable amount of pachinko balls are taken in from the storage unit by the pachinko ball take-in device, so that the pachinko balls stored in the storage unit gradually decrease as the game progresses. on the other hand,
At least when the jackpot game is awarded by the jackpot game granting means,
The pachinko ball payout device pays out a large amount of pachinko balls as prizes in the jackpot game,
The pachinko ball in which the game state control means increases the chance that the game can be started without having to take in the pachinko ball from the storage section by the pachinko ball take-in device after the game state is given the jackpot game. It is controlled to a non-capture game state.

  The pachinko ball take-in type game machine of this technical idea is attached to an island facility to which a pachinko ball is supplied as a game medium. This island facility is generally called a pachinko machine island, and is a facility of a game hall where a pachinko machine using a pachinko ball as a game medium can be installed. In addition, the installation height of the gaming machine in Pachinko Machine Island is most often about 60 cm.

  This pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine (ball throwing and spinning machine 1) is provided with a plurality of symbols and a rotation display row (design reel 301, specifically, a design that can be rotated (rotated). A rotation display device (design variation display device 13) in which a plurality of symbol reels 301a, 301b, 301c) to which reel bands 381a, 381b, 381c are displayed side by side in a direction crossing the rotation direction; And an internal lottery means (internal lottery process executed in S3 in the main control board 400).

  In addition, a pachinko ball take-in device (game ball take-in device 19) that can be taken in as a multiplier of pachinko balls stored in a predetermined reservoir (reservoir dish 20) in response to a pachinko ball hung instruction. I have. The pachinko ball is instructed by, for example, operating the take-in operation unit (the bet buttons 7 and 8) for instructing the take-in of the pachinko ball as a multiplier. When the number of pachinko balls according to the pachinko ball hanging instruction is taken in from the reservoir by the pachinko ball take-in device, the hanging instruction according to the number of pachinko balls taken is established, and the taken pachinko ball is Derived to the equipment side. In general, a player can selectively place one of 1BET, 2BET, and 3BET (in some cases, only 3BET can be used), and a 3BET is played to play a game. Is common. Therefore, when a player plays a game, a considerable amount of pachinko balls are taken into the interior from the storage unit. Here, the “appropriate number of pachinko balls” are 10 or more pachinko balls that may cause a delay in the progress of the game. When playing a game with 3 BETs, 15 pachinko balls are generally used. It is a sphere.

  A plurality of types of symbols are attached to the rotation display row, and the rotation display row rotates in the vertical direction. Further, a plurality (for example, three rows) of the rotation display rows are arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction. Since the rotation direction of the rotation display row is the vertical direction, a plurality of (for example, three rows) rotation display rows are arranged in the left-right direction. In addition, it is more common that the symbol band on which the symbol is drawn is attached to the rotation display row than the symbol is directly drawn on the rotation display row. Accordingly, the “rotation display sequence with a plurality of symbols attached” includes a rotation display sequence to which a design band on which the symbols are drawn is attached.

  The internal lottery means an internal lottery that selects one or more combinations from among a plurality of types of bonus combinations, multiple general combinations, and losers for each game that is played with a pachinko ball as a multiplier. I do. The privilege combination corresponds to the bonus combination in the embodiment. Further, the general combination is all combinations except the bonus combination and the loser combination, and in this embodiment, the bell 1, the bell 2, the watermelon, the cherry, the service combination 1, the service combination 2, and the bonus exclusive combination are equivalent. The probabilities of being selected according to the type of the general combination are different. Further, the bonus combination and the general combination are usually referred to as winning combinations. Note that the pachinko sphere taken in as a multiplier may include electronic data generally called credits in addition to the pachinko sphere taken in from the pachinko sphere taking-in device.

  Note that “a game that is played once a pachinko ball is taken as a multiplier” is a game that is played by setting a predetermined multiplier by taking in a pachinko ball. The game includes one game that is played by the take-in device and one game that is played with a predetermined multiplier automatically set by winning the service combination.

  In addition, the internal lottery means does not necessarily have to be a single role selected from among a plurality of bonus roles, a plurality of general roles, and a loser role. Any mode may be used as long as at least one combination is selected from the above. Therefore, a mode in which two combinations are selected from a plurality of bonus combinations, a plurality of general combinations, and a lost combination is also included.

  When a predetermined multiplier is set by taking in a considerable amount of pachinko balls, it is possible to accept the player's starting operation at the starting operation portion (start lever 9). When the player's starting operation is accepted in the starting operation section, the rotation display control means (reel rotation processing executed in S4 in the main control board 400) starts to rotate all the rotation display rows. To do. When a stop operation of the rotation display row that rotates in the stop operation unit (reel stop buttons 10a to 10c) is received, the rotation display stop control unit (reel stop processing executed in S5 on the main control board 400). ) Is controlled to stop based on the result of the internal lottery. When all the rotation display rows are stopped, the result of the internal lottery can be derived to a predetermined symbol display portion (symbol display window 14) by a combination of symbols attached to each rotation display row. The reason that “it can be derived” is that even if the internal lottery is won, for example, if the selection fails, the result of the internal lottery is not always derived to the display unit.

  In other words, if the line from which the symbol combination as a result of the internal lottery constituted by selecting one symbol for each rotation display row from the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit is derived is an effective line. The result of the internal lottery is derived to a predetermined symbol display unit as a symbol combination located on the effective line by the above-described rotation display stop control means. When all the rotation display rows are stopped, the symbol display unit (determination process executed in S6 in the main control board 400) forms all of the plurality of rotation display rows across the symbol display section. Which of the symbol combinations corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is true (in other words, whether or not one of a plurality of bonus roles and a plurality of general roles has been won) ) Is determined.

  Note that the winning combination determined by the display symbol determining means does not have to be any one of the plurality of bonus combinations and the plurality of general combinations. That is, when a plurality of roles are selected in duplicate, a mode in which the plurality of roles win simultaneously, and even if a plurality of roles are selected in duplicate, Any mode in which only one winning combination can be won is included.

  If it is determined by the display symbol determination means that one of the plurality of general roles has been won, the game value corresponding to the type of the general combination determined to have won is determined for each game. Are awarded as prizes by the game value granting means (payout process executed in S7 in the main control board 400). Here, the “game value” corresponds to, for example, a pachinko ball capable of playing a game, a right of a service technique capable of playing the next game without having to take in the pachinko ball at all.

  In this way, by providing a service role that allows the next game to be played without the need for any pachinko balls to be taken in, the pachinko ball take-in type is different from the pachinko machines that are required to drive the pachinko balls into the game area It is possible to enjoy the fun unique to the spinning game machine, to provide a new game machine that has never existed, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  When a pachinko ball is awarded as an award, the number of pachinko balls to be awarded is paid out to the storage unit by the pachinko ball paying device (game ball paying device 18). The pachinko ball dispensing device receives the supply of pachinko balls from the island facility, and when receiving a dispensing instruction such as when a prize ball is awarded, the number of pachinko balls according to the dispensing instruction is paid from the island facility side to the storage unit. put out.

  In this pachinko ball take-in type game machine, when a bonus combination is selected by internal lottery, a jackpot game (so-called bonus game) in which the chance that a pachinko ball as a game value is awarded as an award increases, It is executed by the big hit game giving means (processing on the control program executed in S322 or S332 in the main control board 400).

  Further, except when the big hit game is awarded, the game state is always the normal game state (the normal game state of this embodiment) by the game state control means (determination process executed in S6 in the main control board 400). Equivalent to a game). The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the total amount of pachinko balls taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device becomes larger than the total amount of pachinko balls paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device as the game progresses. “The total amount of pachinko balls to be taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device as the game progresses” is a pachinko ball as a pachinko ball necessary for executing a predetermined number of times when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state. It is the total amount of pachinko spheres taken in by the take-in device. The “total amount of pachinko balls to be paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device” means the total amount of pachinko balls that can be paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device when the predetermined number of games are executed (probabilistic). The total amount of pachinko balls that can be paid out as a prize. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the normal game state, the pachinko balls stored in the storage unit gradually decrease as the game progresses. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is necessary for the player to replenish a large amount of pachinko balls in the storage unit in order to continue the game. In addition, since a considerable amount of pachinko balls are taken in from the reservoir by the pachinko ball take-in device when one game is executed, the amount of pachinko balls stored in the reservoir is drastically reduced as the game progresses. To do.

  However, at least when a jackpot game is awarded, a large amount of pachinko balls are paid out to the storage unit as a prize by the jackpot game. At the same time, the game state control means does not require the pachinko ball to be taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device for the game state after the big hit game is given, and the chance of starting the game is increased. Control is made to the capture game state (corresponding to the third service game and the fourth service game of the present embodiment).

  This pachinko ball non-capturing game state is that the pachinko ball is completely captured by the pachinko ball capturing device until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number of games are executed or a predetermined eye is derived). Without being executed, a bet is automatically established and the start operation unit becomes effective. That is, the player can continue the game without reducing the number of pachinko balls stored in the storage unit. Here, the pachinko ball non-taking game state is not limited to the service game in which the winning probability for the service role is increased as in this embodiment, and the game is unconditionally (regardless of the reel appearance) without taking the pachinko ball. Including a gaming state in which Specifically, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, a gaming state in which the benefit of playing a game without taking in pachinko balls is given unconditionally, or all winning and losing roles are always or highly probable with service skills. The game state may overlap. In addition, the pachinko ball non-uptake game state is only a game state in which the pachinko ball is not automatically taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device, and the bet is automatically established and the chance that the starting operation unit becomes effective is increased. Alternatively, a gaming state may be established in which a bet is automatically established and the opportunity to automatically start the next game is increased without a start operation in the start operation unit.

  By the way, since this pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine uses pachinko balls as game media, it is necessary to take in a considerable amount of pachinko balls inside to play one game (for example, (The number of pachinko balls required for 3 bets is 15 balls).

  Conventionally, in the case of a spinning-reel game machine, when the game medium is paid out by the payout device, the start lever is not accepted and the game is controlled so as not to be started. Therefore, in pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machines that use pachinko balls as game media, the number of award ball payouts tends to increase. As a result, the progress of the game may be delayed. In particular, such a phenomenon is likely to occur in a jackpot game in which prize balls are paid out in a short time.

  In view of these characteristics, in this pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine using pachinko balls as a game medium, the pachinko balls in the storage section gradually decrease in the normal gaming state, so the player must replenish the pachinko balls. However, after the big hit game, it is controlled to a pachinko ball non-uptake game state in which the game proceeds without any need of taking in the pachinko ball. Therefore, in the pachinko ball non-incorporating game state, the player can proceed with only the winning ball acquired by the big hit game without requiring the player to replenish the pachinko ball.

  By the way, in general, in the pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine, there is a limit to the amount of pachinko balls that can be stored in the storage part. It is necessary to move the pachinko ball to a dish or prize ball box. On the other hand, as described above, since the amount of pachinko balls required to be executed in one game is large, compared to a ball game machine or the like that launches and plays pachinko balls one by one, There is a risk that the ball will decrease quickly (that is, the pachinko balls in the reservoir are likely to disappear). In particular, even if a large number of prize balls are won by the big hit game, if the pachinko ball is quickly lost from the storage part in the subsequent game, there is a possibility that the interest of the game improved by the big hit game may be reduced at once. is there.

  In this regard, in this pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine, after the big hit game, the pachinko ball is not taken in at all and it is controlled to the pachinko ball non-take-in game state where the game progresses, so the player is in the storage dish There is no need to replenish pachinko balls at all, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the player and make the game progress smoothly. In addition, since the pachinko ball non-incorporated gaming state does not directly give a large amount of prize balls to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest after the big hit game while balancing the profits of the hall and the player. Furthermore, in the pachinko ball non-capture game state, the game can be performed while maintaining the state where the storage portion is filled with a large amount of prize balls, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game improved by the big hit game. The

[Technology 2]
The pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 2,
In the pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 1,
The bonus combination includes a special bonus combination in which a special jackpot game in which a pachinko ball exceeding the range that can be stored in the storage unit as the jackpot game is paid out, and within a substantially range that can be stored in the storage unit as the jackpot game. Including a normal bonus role in which a normal jackpot game is given, in which a pachinko ball is paid out to fit in,
The gaming state control means includes
When the special jackpot game that allows the player to acquire the largest number of pachinko balls is given, the gaming state after the special jackpot game is given by the pachinko ball capturing device rather than the normal gaming state. While controlling the first pachinko ball non-uptake gaming state in which the frequency of taking pachinko balls is suppressed,
When the normal big hit game is given, which has a smaller number of payouts of pachinko balls than the special big hit game, the gaming state after the normal big hit game is given is more than the first pachinko ball non-intake gaming state. Further, the pachinko ball taking-in device is controlled to a second pachinko ball non-uptake gaming state in which the frequency of taking in the pachinko ball is suppressed.

  According to this technical idea, as a bonus game, as a bonus game, a special bonus game (corresponding to BB in this embodiment) to which a special bonus game in which pachinko balls exceeding the range that can be stored in the storage unit are paid out is given, As a game, a normal bonus combination (corresponding to RB in the present embodiment) to which a normal big hit game is given in which a pachinko ball is paid out so as to be within a range that can be stored in the storage unit is included. In other words, both the regular bonus role and the special bonus role are different in the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, but the special bonus game based on the special bonus role is more than the normal jackpot game based on the normal bonus role. This is advantageous for players because there are many prize balls that can be acquired.

  In this special jackpot game, a number of prize balls exceeding the maximum storable number of the storage section are paid out, and it is necessary for the player to transfer the prize balls overflowing the storage section. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot game, the number of prize balls that do not exceed the maximum storable number of the storage unit is paid out, so that it is not necessary for the player to transfer the prize ball from the storage unit to another. The “reservoir” may include not only the conventional upper plate but also both the upper plate and the lower plate.

  When the special jackpot game that allows the player to acquire the most pachinko balls is given, the gaming state control means changes the gaming state after the special jackpot game is given to a pachinko game rather than the normal gaming state. The first pachinko ball non-taking game state (corresponding to the third service game of the present embodiment) in which the frequency with which the pachinko ball is taken in by the ball taking device is suppressed is controlled. On the other hand, when a normal big hit game with a smaller number of payouts of pachinko balls than the special big hit game is given, the gaming state after the normal big hit game is given is more than the first pachinko ball non-capture game state. Furthermore, it controls to the 2nd pachinko ball non-taking-in game state (equivalent to the 4th service game of this embodiment) by which the frequency in which a pachinko ball is taken in by the pachinko ball taking-in apparatus is suppressed. That is, the first pachinko ball non-uptake game state and the second pachinko ball non-uptake game state are both in the pachinko ball non-uptake game state, but the pachinko ball uptake frequency is different. The 2-pachinko ball non-uptake game state is more advantageous to the player because the pachinko ball uptake frequency is lower than the first pachinko ball non-uptake game state based on the special jackpot game.

  Here, in the conventional revolving type gaming machine, it is common to have a big bonus with a large number of prize balls paid out and a regular bonus with a small number of prize balls paid out as bonus types. As pachinko balls are used, the award ball payout amount tends to increase, so that even if any bonus is won, the award ball overflows from the reservoir. Therefore, no matter which bonus is won, the player has to transfer the award ball overflowing from the storage part to another.

  In view of these characteristics, a number of bonus combinations with different prize ball payout numbers are provided, and the prize balls are paid out to the extent that it overflows from the storage section only during special jackpot games based on special bonus combinations. . On the other hand, in the normal jackpot game based on the normal bonus combination, the prize balls that can fit in the storage part are paid out. The game state is such that when the normal big hit game is finished, the degree of playing the game without taking in the pachinko balls is larger than when the special big hit game is finished. As described above, although the normal big hit game has fewer prize balls than the special big hit game, after the big hit game, the player can proceed with the game without replenishing any pachinko balls with only the smaller prize balls.

  In this way, only when a special bonus combination with a large number of prize ball payouts is won, the prize ball is paid out to the extent that it overflows from the storage unit, while only when a normal bonus combination with a small number of prize ball payouts is won. The prize balls are paid out to the extent that they fit in the game, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the prize balls overflow from the storage section during the big hit game. And in special jackpot games, a sense of superiority and a sense of acquisition are given by overflowing prize balls from the storage section, while in normal jackpot games, there is no need for the player to handle the prize balls overflowing from the storage section. Progress can be made smooth. Also, in general, when a player wins a normal bonus role with a small number of award balls, the player is discouraged. After the normal big hit game, the player can advance the game without replenishing any pachinko balls. Since it is controlled to the pachinko ball non-take-in game state, not only the discouragement due to winning the normal bonus combination can be suppressed, but the game can be continued while maintaining a sense of expectation for the next big hit.

[Technology 3]
The pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 3,
In the pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2,
When the special grant conditions are met, the hitting game increases the chance that the game can be started without the need to take in the pachinko ball in the aspect different from the pachinko ball non-uptake game state in the aspect. A medium hitting game granting means that can be given as a privilege,
When the middle hit game is given by the middle hit game giving means, the pachinko ball payout device suppresses the pachinko ball payout frequency more than the big hit game, but the pachinko ball take-in device By limiting the uptake of pachinko balls from the storage section, pachinko balls stored in the storage section gradually increase as the game progresses.

  According to this technical idea, when a special grant condition (for example, a special eye is derived by a reel roll) is satisfied, the game can be started without having to take the pachinko ball by the pachinko ball take-in device. A hit game with an increased chance (corresponding to the second service game of the present embodiment) is executed by a hit game giving means (determination process executed in S6 on the main control board 400). As the “special grant condition” in the present embodiment, the special general combination (bell 2) is selected from the internal combinations in the internal lottery, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special general combination is derived to the symbol display unit. Will be satisfied if done. The symbol combination corresponding to this special general combination corresponds to “M child symbol-I male symbol-M child symbol” (bell 2 symbol) of the present embodiment.

  And, when a medium hit game is given, the pachinko ball payout frequency by the pachinko ball payout device is suppressed compared to the big hit game, but the pachinko ball take-in from the storage part by the pachinko ball take-in device is suppressed. By being restricted, the pachinko balls stored in the storage part gradually increase as the game progresses. In other words, the hit game is not taken in by the pachinko ball take-in device until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number of games are executed or a predetermined eye is derived). Then, a bet is automatically established and the start operation unit becomes effective. That is, the player can continue the game without reducing the number of pachinko balls stored in the storage unit. On the other hand, if a small role with a prize ball payout in the middle hit game is won, the corresponding prize ball is paid out. As a result, the pachinko balls stored in the storage portion gradually increase as the game progresses.

  The hit game is not limited to a service game in which the winning probability for a service role is increased as in this embodiment, and a game mode in which a game progresses unconditionally (regardless of reel appearance) without taking in a pachinko ball. including. Specifically, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, a game mode in which the benefit of playing a game without taking in pachinko balls is given unconditionally, or all winning and losing roles always or with high probability overlap with service skills It may be a gaming mode.

  As described above, the pachinko ball take-in type game machine has a middle hit game in which the game progresses without taking in the pachinko ball and the holding ball gradually increases as a benefit other than the big hit game. This hit game is less paid out than the big hit game, but you can play the game without taking pachinko balls, so you can continue playing the game without replenishing the pachinko balls at all with this fewer prize balls. It is possible to reduce the time and effort of the player and make the game progress smoothly. Then, it takes time to pay out a large amount of prize balls as in the case of a conventional privilege (bonus game), and it does not take time to process the prize balls overflowing from the storage section, and the frustration due to the delay in the progress of the game. The feeling can be reduced.

  Further, by making it possible to give a player a different benefit of a medium hit game separately from the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest even if the big hit game is not given. Furthermore, since the hit game does not give a large amount of prize balls directly to the player compared to the big hit game, controlling the hit game does not impair the profit of the hole. The interests can be kept from deteriorating while balancing the profits. Furthermore, in the middle hit game, in addition to a part of the big hit game as a bonus, by providing a hit game in which the game can be executed without taking in a pachinko ball, while maintaining a certain payout rate However, the irritation caused by the delay of the game can be reduced.

[Technology 4]
The pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 4 is
In the pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 3,
The gaming state control means, in place of the normal gaming state in which both the jackpot game and the medium hitting game can be selectively given as a privilege, in a privilege limited state in which only the jackpot game can be given as a privilege, The game state can be controlled.

  According to this technical idea, the gaming state control means is a privilege limited state in which only a jackpot game can be granted as a privilege instead of a normal gaming state in which both a jackpot game and a medium hit game can be selectively granted as a privilege. The gaming state can be controlled (corresponding to the first service game of the present embodiment). The “normal game state” is a game state that is relatively advantageous to the player because any privilege such as a big hit game and a middle hit game can be given. The “privilege restricted state” is a relatively unfavorable game state for a player because a bonus game can be given as a bonus, but no mid hit game is given.

  In this way, in this pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine, by always controlling to the normal gaming state, it can be in a double chance state that can be expected for both big hit games and medium hit games While it is possible to improve the interest of the game, the overall game play rate is suppressed by setting the game state to a privilege-restricted state at a predetermined opportunity (for example, when a specific item is derived by reel appearance). Balance with the hall.

  Furthermore, by providing a privilege-restricted state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to maintain a high probability of winning the overall jackpot and to increase the probability of winning the mid-win in the normal gaming state. . As a result, in the normal gaming state, the expectation to the big hit or the middle hit can be further improved, and the monotony of the game can be eliminated.

[Technology 5]
The pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 5 is
In the pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4,
An effect image display device for displaying a predetermined effect image;
Effect image display control means for performing display control of the effect image in the effect image display device;
It is arranged in an outer frame attached to the island facility and has a casing having a vertically long rectangular front game part,
The housing has an information display area formed in a substantially upper half of the front game portion,
In the upper end area of the information display area, a small window portion is formed as the symbol display section for displaying one or more symbols for each rotation display row, and an abbreviation excluding the upper end area of the information display area. The effect image display device is arranged so that the effect image is displayed in the entire area.

  According to the present technical idea, an effect image display device (effect display device 15) on which a predetermined effect image is displayed, and effect image display control means (sub-board 360) for performing display control of the effect image in the effect image display device, And a housing (main body housing 3) which is disposed in an outer frame (outer frame 2) attached to the island facility and has a vertically long rectangular front game portion (door-shaped front member 4).

  A small window portion (drum window portion 14) as the symbol display portion is formed in the upper end region of the information display region (transparent window 12) of the housing. In addition, the small window portion functions as a symbol display portion from which a single game result is derived, and is not limited to an opening, so that the symbol can be visually recognized through the small window portion. It only has to be. Further, in the small window portion, three symbols out of a plurality of symbols attached to each rotation display row are displayed for each rotation display row. Each of the three symbols is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower stages along the rotation direction.

  The “upper stage” is a position on the upper stage line 622a of the present embodiment, the “middle stage” is a position on the middle stage line 621 of the present embodiment, and the “lower stage” is a position on the lower stage line 622b of the present embodiment. It is. That is, when the rotation of all the rotation display rows is stopped, one symbol is displayed for every rotation display row in all the upper, middle and lower stages in the small window portion. In other words, if one rotation display row is called one row, a total of nine symbols of “3 stages × 3 rows” are displayed.

  In addition, the above-described effect image display device is arranged so that a predetermined effect image is displayed in substantially the entire area (display device window portion 16) excluding the upper end region in the information display area. Since this effect image display device is housed and arranged in the housing (because it is placed inside the housing), the effect image display device is installed on the front game unit side of the housing. There is no need for an attachment on the periphery. As a result, the effect image can be displayed in substantially the entire area of the information display area excluding the upper end area. That is, in this pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine, an effect image display device having a relatively large planar area is disposed at a position facing the player, and a relatively flat surface is provided above the effect image display device. By forming a small window portion having a small area and deriving a symbol combination to the small window portion, the gaming machine mainly includes an effect image display device.

  By the way, conventionally, combinations of symbols to be derived (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “reel rolls”) have been derived along a single effective line. Moreover, since all the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are derived so as to have the same symbol, the player can grasp the winning combination only by looking at the reel appearance. Therefore, it was possible to actually play a game without looking at the production image, just by looking at the reel appearance. Further, even if a rotation display device for deriving a symbol combination is arranged above the effect image display device having a relatively large planar area, when a certain effect image is displayed, the reels are inevitably displayed as a player psychology. Eyes tend to be in the eyes. Furthermore, even if the player is not conscious of seeing the reels, if all the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination are derived in a straight line with the same symbols, they often get into the eyes naturally. . For this reason, even if an effect image display device is provided, the effect displayed on the effect image display device may be halved.

  As a measure to turn the player's eyes to the effect image display device, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is a so-called “break” symbol (the symbol combinations derived along the effective line are all different in a plurality of rotation display columns). It is possible to make it difficult to determine the winning combination based on the reel appearance by making the effective line complicated or the effective line complicated. However, with such a strategy, it is necessary to rely entirely on the production image, and even though the production image is displayed with a high expectation that will be advantageous to the player, When it does not become an advantageous state, the reliability with respect to the effect image displayed on an effect image display apparatus will become low. As a result, the player plays the game without being able to grasp the current game state at all, resulting in anxiety for the player.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine, although it is possible to grasp the reel output led out to the small window part, the small window part has a relatively small plane area and enters the player's field of view. Since it is arranged in the upper end area of the difficult information display area, it is difficult to immediately grasp the winning combination indicated by the reel roll unless the player consciously watches the small window part. Yes. On the other hand, since the effect image display device having a relatively large planar area is arranged at the position facing the player, the effect image displayed on the effect image display device is inevitably included in the player's field of view. Become. As described above, by adopting a configuration in which the player's consciousness is more easily directed to the effect image display device than the rotation display device, the player is interested only in the reel appearance, and the effect of the effect image is hindered. That can be reduced.

[Technology 6]
The pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 6 is
In the pachinko ball take-in type spinning machine described in Technical Thought 5,
The housing is
A horizontally-operated operation panel formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front game portion toward the player, and at least the start operation portion and the stop operation portion are disposed below the information display area;
With
The reservoir is
It is composed of a member different from the operation panel, and is a dish-shaped member having a one-plate structure projecting from the lower side of the operation panel on the front surface of the front game unit to the player side,
The pachinko balls paid out from the pachinko ball paying device are stored, and the pachinko balls are allowed to flow down toward the pachinko ball taking-in device.

  According to this technical idea, a horizontally-operated operation panel (operation panel 6) formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front game section toward the player side and provided with at least a start operation section and a stop operation section below the information display area. ) Is provided in the housing. In addition, the storage unit is a separate member from the operation panel, and is a dish-shaped member having a one-plate structure projecting from the lower side of the operation panel to the player side on the front surface of the front game unit, from the pachinko ball payout device. While storing the paid-out pachinko sphere, the pachinko sphere is caused to flow down toward the pachinko sphere take-in device.

  As described above, the storage unit is configured by a member different from the operation panel and is formed below the operation panel, so that the player can operate the start operation unit, the stop operation unit, and the like in a relaxed state. ing. Furthermore, since the storage unit adopts a one-plate structure (that is, a structure in which the lower plate generally provided in this type of gaming machine is removed), the arrangement position of the storage unit and the operation panel is lowered overall. be able to. And it becomes possible to arrange | position an information display area in the appropriate position with sufficient visibility, and can make a player play a game in a comfortable condition.

  The above is one form of the ball throwing drum machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine other than the ball throwing and spinning machine, for example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

It is a front part of a ball throwing cylinder machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball throwing cylinder machine from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball throwing rotator machine of the state which opened the door-shaped front member from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the ball throwing cylinder machine from the front upper right. It is a substantially center longitudinal cross-sectional view of a ball throwing cylinder machine. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 5. FIG. 6 is a BB cross-sectional view of FIG. 5. It is the rear view which looked at the door-shaped front member from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the door-shaped front member from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the door-shaped front member from the back upper left. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game ball taking-in apparatus and was seen from the game machine back direction. (A) is a front view of a game ball transport body, (b) is a side view of the game ball transport body, and (c) is a rear view of the game ball transport body. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the ball removal valve and the ball removal valve detector which detects whether the ball removal valve is moving forward or backward. It is a figure which shows the taking-in operation state of a game ball taking-in apparatus from a back direction. It is a figure which shows the state which the ball removal valve moves to a retreat position by operation of a player, and is performing ball removal. It is a figure which shows the state in which the game ball | bowl conveyance body is reverse | reversed in order to discharge the game ball which remains in the game ball taking-in apparatus. It is a figure which shows the case where a missing | missing has occurred in the game ball which should be taken in continuously during taking-in operation in the game ball taking-in apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows a time change of game ball taking-in operation, (a) is a timing chart at the time of a normal taking-in state, and (b) is a timing when omission occurs at the time of taking-in It is a chart. It is the perspective view which looked at the airplane tank from the front upper right. It is a front view of an in-flight tank. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the full tank detection unit in an in-machine tank. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration in a door-shaped front member from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration from the back upper left. It is a disassembled expansion perspective view of the plating decoration unit in an upper decoration. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the attachment state of a plating decoration unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the symbol fluctuation display device from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the symbol fluctuation display device from the back upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the symbol fluctuation display apparatus from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which disassembled the design reel from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the symbol reel from back upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel mounting part from the back side upper part. It is the perspective view which looked at the reel mounting part from the back side lower side. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the reel mounting part with which the symbol fluctuation display apparatus was mounted | worn. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body case from the front upper left. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body case from back upper left. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the main body housing | casing from the front upper right. It is the figure which expanded a part of front view of a main body housing | casing. It is a perspective view of the main body case showing a state in which the setting cover is opened. It is an expanded sectional view of the principal part near a setting cover. It is the perspective view which looked at the locking device from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the locking device from back upper left. It is the expansion perspective view which looked at the mechanism of the principal part in a locking device from back upper left. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the state which disassembled the locking device from back upper left. It is a perspective view which shows a cylinder lock and a locking mechanism. It is a rear view of the principal part of a locking device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation state of the locking mechanism in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating cancellation | release of a locking mechanism. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the holding state in the unlocking position in the operating rod for doors. It is the figure which showed roughly the structure of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, an operation member, etc. with which the ball throwing cylinder machine is equipped. It is a figure which shows the state which expand | deployed planarly the symbol row | line | column described on each reel band attached | subjected to each symbol reel. It is the figure which expanded the symbol display window. It is a figure for demonstrating the effective line of a ball throwing drum machine. It is an enlarged view for explaining a game state lamp It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each winning combination of a ball throwing round machine, and its privilege (the number of payout balls). It is a flowchart which shows one processing procedure of a basic in a ball throwing round machine. It is a flowchart which shows specifically each process performed by a starting process. It is the figure which showed concretely the win value and internal lottery probability about all the winning combinations of a ball throwing round machine. It is the figure which showed concretely the win value and internal lottery probability about all the winning combinations of a ball throwing round machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a BB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of BB game completion | finish determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a RB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of RB game completion | finish determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of ST demotion determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of ST promotion determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a service game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a service game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process regarding control of a game ball taking-in apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball taking-in process performed in a game ball taking-in apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball taking-in process performed in a game ball taking-in apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball taking-in process performed in a game ball taking-in apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process performed in the game ball taking-in apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect image in each stage, (a) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of 1st stage, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of 2nd stage, (c) is the 1st The figure which shows an example of the effect image of 3 stages, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of a 4th stage. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect image of a special stage. It is a figure which shows a bet number display meter. It is a figure which shows a bonus expectation degree display meter.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Ball throwing machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body case 4 Door-shaped front member 6 Operation panel 7 MAX bet button 8 1 bet button 9 Start lever 10 Reel stop button 10a Left reel stop button 10b Middle reel stop button 10c Right reel stop Button 12 Transparent window 13 Pattern change display device 14 Pattern display window (drum window)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 15 Display device 16 Display device window 18 Game ball payout device 19 Game ball take-in device 20 Storage tray body 21 Gap 22 Ball drop hole 22a Ball drop valve 23 Ball drop button 24 Payout port 25 Storage portion 26 Passage portion 27 Bank portion 28 Closing member 29 Ball viewing window 30 Open space 31 Game state lamp 35 Flat protrusion 36 Lending settlement operation part 37 Inclined surface 38 Illumination part 39 In-machine tank 50 Return inclination passage 51 Base 51a Ball release valve detector mounting hole 51b Shading wall 52 Back ball passage member 52a Back inflow passage 52b Back game ball carrier rotation space 52c Back game ball drop path 52d Back ball passage path 53 Front ball path member 53a Front inflow passage 53b Front game ball transport body rotation space 53c Front game ball fall Path 53d Front ball removal path 53e Front game ball discharge port 53f Valve sliding part 54 Game ball carrier 54A Hand Front sphere receiving portion 54B Back sphere receiving portion 54C Disc portion 54d Recessed portion 54d1 Base end portion 54d2 Inclined portion 54e Protruding portion 54e1 Base end portion 54e2 Inclined portion 55 Ball release valve 55a Valve light shielding portion 55b Back sphere passage valve 55c Front sphere passage valve 55d Mounting claw section 55e Coil spring mounting section 56 Ball extraction valve detector 56a Ball extraction valve detector Light emitting section 56b Ball extraction valve detector light receiving section 56c Ball extraction valve detector fixing claw section 57 Back-in count switch 58 Count switch 59 Back proximity switch 60 Front proximity switch 61 Coil spring 62 Motor shaft 63 Angle detection plate 63a Slit 64 Photo switch for angle detection 65 Light blocking member 67 Game ball take-in device board 69 Front ball biting prevention piece 70 Heat radiation plate 71 Flat portion 72 Arc surface portion 73 Upper surface portion 74 Bottom surface portion 75 Bottom surface portion 76 Prize ball guiding spaces 77a and 77b 78 Notch opening 79 Opening portion 80 Filling detection unit 81 Unit frame 82 Prize ball opening 83 Side guide plate 83a Side plate 84 Partition wall 85 Main side guide path 86 Sub side guide path 87 Oscillating plate 87a Arc plate 87b Detection Portion 87c Shaft tube portion 87d Guide projection 88 Swing shaft 89 Full detection switch 100 Door base member 100a First opening portion 100b Second opening portion 100c Third opening portion 101 Reinforcing metal frame 104 Hook portion 105 Sound passage hole portion 106 Plating Decoration unit 107 Decoration member 108 Colored resin member 109 Illumination device 110 Light emitting substrate 112 Lens mounting plate 113a First lens body 113b Second lens body 113c Base 113d Streamlined protrusion 114 Reflective recess 114a Streamlined hole 115 Reflective surface 116 Lens cover 118 Screws 119, 120 Through-hole 121 Screw hole 122 Hinge mechanism 1 23 Locking device 130 Speaker 301 Design reel 301a Left reel 301b Middle reel 301c Right reel 302 Device case 302a Screw hole 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 308a Through hole 309 Cover body 310 Frame portion 311 Partition Portion 311a Shielding portion 312 Mounting hole 313a, 313b Screw 314 Substrate case 315 Reel substrate 316a Connector 316b Connector 316c Connector 316d Connector 317 Connector 320 Motor mounting plate 320a Motor mounting portion 320b Light mounting portion 320c Mounting piece 320d Through hole 320e Extension lower portion 320f Mounting piece 320g Extension upper part 321 Reel motor 321a Left reel motor 321b Middle reel motor 321c Right reel motor 322 Backlight 322b Reflector 3 3 Flange 323a Fitting portion 323b Protrusion 324 Lock screw 325 Photo sensor 325a Left reel position sensor 325b Middle reel position sensor 325c Right reel position sensor 326 Relay plate 327a Screw 328 Binding member 330 Side member 330a Through hole 330b Circular housing portion 330c Anti-rotation protrusion 331 Light-shielding piece 333 Slit 333a Hooking portion 341 Reel mounting portion 342 Ground contact piece 343 Case-side contact piece 344 Door-side contact piece 345 Contacted piece 350 Groove portion 351 Mounting portion 352 Lower protrusion piece 353 Upper protrusion piece 354 Engagement portion 355 Screw 360 Sub-board 361 Liquid crystal drive board 362 First board case 363 Lamp drive board 364 Second board cases 381a, 381b, 381c Reel band 400 Main control board 401 Main board case 402 Delivery control board 40 Dispensing substrate case 404a Opening 405 Transparent plate 406 Screw 407 Reinforcing member 408 Setting operation unit 409 Setting change switch 410 Locking unit 412 Setting cover 413 Shaft member 415 Seal sticking plate 417a First covering portion 417b Second covering portion 418 Button Shaped panel fastener 420 Projecting member 500 Mounting base 500a Locking claw 501 Locking tool 502 Main body frame locking hook 503 Main frame fixing rod 505 Locking fixture 506 Door locking hook 507 Door locking rod 507b Engaging recess 508 First elastic Member 508a Latch claw 509 Second elastic member 509a Latch claw 515 Cylinder lock 516 Engagement groove 517 Main body cam piece 518 Engagement groove 519 Door cam piece 523 Main body frame notch 524 Door notch 526 Lock mechanism 527 Lock claw Part 528 lock rotation member 528s shaft part 52 Third elastic member 530 Locking operation piece 530a Latching hole 531 Contact portion 532 Rotating shaft portion 533 Fourth elastic member 534 Roller 540 Unlocking mechanism 541 Through-hole portion 542 Body frame sliding contact surface 543 Door sliding contact surface 545 Holding member 545a Claw portion 546 Fifth elastic member 550 Side frame portion 551 First attachment portion 552 Second attachment portion 553 Third attachment portion 555 Opening portion 556 Protrusion hook portion 557 Crime prevention cover 602 Game ball insertion number display lamp 602a Game ball insertion Number display lamp 602b Game ball insertion number display lamp 602c Game ball insertion number display lamp 604 Error display lamp 605 Stop display lamp 606 Service game display lamp 608 Game start display lamp 610 Game ball insertion display lamp 612 Game ball discharge display lamp 621 Middle stage Line 622a Upper line 622b Lower line 623 Right-up line 623b downward-sloping line 624a V-shaped-shaped line 624b inverted V-shaped-shaped line

Claims (3)

A pachinko ball take-in type revolving game machine installed in an island facility supplied with pachinko balls as a game medium,
A pachinko ball supplied from the island facility, and a pachinko ball replenished by a player, a storage unit capable of storing a certain amount or more ,
A rotation display device in which a plurality of rotation display rows which are attached with a plurality of symbols and which can be rotated and displayed are arranged side by side in a direction crossing the rotation direction;
A pachinko ball capturing device capable of capturing pachinko balls stored in the reservoir, and
When a considerable amount of pachinko balls are taken in from the storage unit by the pachinko ball take-in device, start operation means capable of accepting a player's start operation and playing one game ,
Performing a plurality of types of benefits officers, and, several general role double, the internal lottery which can be won in any one of a plurality of winning combinations, including at least, after each game based on starting operation of the start operation unit Internal lottery means;
When the start operation is accepted in the start operation unit, a rotating display control means for rotating the plurality of rotation display column,
A stop operation unit capable of accepting a stop operation for each of the plurality of rotation display columns in order to stop the plurality of rotation display columns rotated by the rotation display control means for each column;
Rotation display stop control means for controlling the rotation stop of the rotation display row based on the result of the internal lottery for each rotation display row for which the stop operation is accepted in the stop operation portion;
It is determined whether a combination of symbols formed across all of the plurality of rotation display rows in a predetermined symbol display unit corresponds to any of the symbol combinations corresponding to the plurality of winning combinations. Display symbol determination means;
When the display symbol determining means determines that a combination of symbols corresponding to the general combination has been displayed, a game value is added that gives a game value corresponding to the type of the general combination as a prize for each game Means,
When a pachinko ball is given as the award, a pachinko ball payout device that pays out the given number of pachinko balls to the storage unit;
When it is determined by the display symbol determination means that a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the plurality of types of bonus combinations is displayed, the pachinko ball as the game value is stored as a prize by the pachinko ball payout device. Jackpot game granting means for granting a jackpot game with an increased chance of being paid out to the club as a privilege,
The gaming state always, the game total pachinko balls taken up by the pachinko ball capture device as it progresses, the control to the normal game state becomes larger than the total amount of pachinko balls to be paid out as a prize by the pachinko ball dispensing device Gaming state control means to
With
The multiple types of privilege roles include
A special bonus role that is awarded a jackpot game in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out, and a normal bonus role that is awarded a jackpot game in which only the prize balls within the range where the pachinko balls as the prize are stored in the storage unit are given. Included
For the plurality of general roles,
Even if the stop operation is performed at any timing when winning in the internal lottery, even if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed in the predetermined symbol display section and the internal lottery is won A combination of symbols that is displayed on the predetermined symbol display unit only when the stop operation is performed at a specific timing,
The internal lottery means
When winning one of the multiple types of privilege combinations, the special privilege combination is not the special privilege combination so that the opportunity to replenish pachinko balls in the storage unit is suppressed by winning the normal privilege combination frequently. In addition, the internal lottery is performed so that the normal bonus combination is won,
When the winning combination is won in the internal lottery, even if the stop operation is not performed at the specific timing, the winning combination is such that the pachinko ball as the award is paid out toward the storage unit. When the winning combination wins, the internal lottery is performed so that the shared winning combination with the non-missing winning combination is won,
The gaming state control means includes
Controlling the game state of after the jackpot gaming has been applied, the pachinko ball non taking playing state starting the opportunity to become possible to increase the game without introducing pachinko balls from the reservoir by the pachinko ball capture device And
Although the under normal gaming state pachinko balls to be stored in the storage unit as the game progresses is reduced, pachinko Tamato, wherein a work burden of supplying pachinko balls to the reservoir has to be alleviated Built-in spinning machine. The starting operation means includes
Claims include a non-startable means for controlling the game so that the game is not started even when the start operation is performed when the pachinko ball as the prize is paid out toward the storage unit by the pachinko ball payout device. Item 1. A gaming machine according to Item 1. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising an effect display device for displaying a predetermined effect image.